JP2002189168A - Lens driving device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a lens driving device size and cost of the lens barrel of which is prevented from increasing while keeping its detecting performance of the position of a movable lens group. SOLUTION: A 1st lens group 101, a 2nd lens group 102 and a 3rd lens group 103 are disposed along an optical axis O, and the 2nd lens group 102 of the lens groups is the movable lens group and moves along the optical axis O. A detection plate 105b having fixed width in the direction of the optical axis O is formed on a 2nd lens frame 105 holding the 2nd lens group 102. The position of the 2nd lens group 102 is sensed by detecting the passing of both ends of the detection plate 105b by a detector 96.

Description

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0001]

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a lens driving device used in an optical system of an optical apparatus such as a camera and for performing zooming and focusing.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a lens barrel used in an optical system of an optical apparatus such as a camera to perform zooming and focus adjustment, there are four lens groups as described in JP-A-7-20369. It is known that all of these lens groups are mounted on a frame extending from the camera body, and the lens group is appropriately moved in the optical axis direction using a cam mechanism to perform zooming and focus adjustment.

The lens barrel includes a barrier blade provided in front of a photographing optical system for opening and closing an optical path, and a lens driving mechanism for moving a part of the photographing optical system in the optical axis direction when the photographing optical system is focused. A barrier drive mechanism for opening and closing the barrier blades, a first transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive source to the lens drive mechanism, and a second transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive source to the barrier drive mechanism. The transmission of the driving force to the second transmission mechanism through the clutch mechanism is appropriately switched. The switching of the clutch mechanism is performed by using a rotating member, so that space efficiency is improved and the camera is downsized.

[0004]

However, in such a lens barrel, in order to realize precise focus adjustment, it is necessary to directly detect the position of the moving lens group and move the lens group accurately. desirable. In order to detect the position of the lens group, a position detection sensor is required. If the position detection sensor is provided, the lens barrel may be enlarged, and the cost of parts increases.

Accordingly, the present invention has been made to solve such a problem, and a lens capable of detecting the position of a movable lens group and preventing an increase in the size and cost of a lens barrel. It is an object to provide a driving device.

[0006]

In order to achieve the above object, a lens driving device according to the present invention comprises a plurality of lens groups arranged along an optical axis and at least one of the plurality of lens groups. A movable lens group that can move one movable lens group, a movable body that moves in the direction of the optical axis together with the movable lens group, and has a fixed width in the direction of the optical axis; And detection means for detecting passage.

Further, the lens driving device according to the present invention is characterized in that the detecting means is an optical detector.

In the lens driving apparatus according to the present invention, the above-mentioned lens optical system is housed in a plurality of cylinders which can be extended in multiple stages, and the movable lens group changes the standby position according to the extension position of the cylinder. Features.

[0009] According to these inventions, by detecting the passage of both ends of the moving body with a certain width, the time when one end of the moving body passes through the detection position and the time when the other end passes are detected. The moving position of the movable lens group when passing through can be detected. Therefore, two positions of the movable lens group can be detected by one detecting means and one moving body, and there is no need to provide a plurality of detecting means and moving bodies. Therefore, the size and cost of the lens driving device can be reduced. Further, the size and cost of the lens barrel can be reduced.

Further, by detecting the position of the movable lens group at two locations, it is possible to accurately set the reference position of the movable lens group at two locations. By setting two standby positions of the movable lens group based on the extended state of the lens barrel with reference to these two reference positions, the amount of movement of the movable lens group during focusing can be reduced. . As a result, a movement error is reduced, and accurate focusing can be performed. Further, time parallax (time delay) at the time of shooting can be reduced.

[0011]

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description is omitted. Also, the dimensional ratios in the drawings do not always match those described.

FIGS. 1 and 2 show a camera using the lens driving device according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 1, the lens driving device according to the present embodiment is used for a photographing optical system of a camera 2. The camera 2 has a front surface 7 of the main body 3.
The lens barrel 1 can be extended from the lens barrel. The lens barrel 1 has a plurality of cylinders that can be extended in multiple stages, that is, a first cylinder 4, a second cylinder 5, and a third cylinder 6. First cylinder 4
The second cylinder 5 can be extended and extended with respect to the first cylinder 4, and the third cylinder 6 can be extended and extended with respect to the second cylinder 5. The extension and retraction are performed by operating a switch of the main body 3.

A photometric sensor window 8 is provided above the front surface 7 of the main body 3. Inside the photometric sensor window 8,
A photometric sensor 9 is provided. Also, the upper surface 1 of the main body 3
At 0, a shutter button 11 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 2, a display unit 13 is provided on the rear surface 12 of the main body 3 near the center thereof. As the display unit 13, for example, an LCD capable of displaying a mark indicating a shooting mode or the like or a number for date display is used. Below the display unit 13, a mode switch 14, a self-timer switch 15, and a main switch (power switch) 16 are arranged in parallel.

In the center of the upper part of the back surface 12, AFLE
D17 is provided. A zoom switch 18 is provided on the upper right side of the rear surface 12. The zoom switch 18 includes a TELE switch 19 and a WIDE switch 20. A cartridge lid 21 is provided at a lower portion of the main body 3. By opening the cartridge lid 21, the cartridge film can be taken out of the main body 3 or loaded into the main body 3. Further, a cartridge presence / absence switch (not shown) is provided in the storage portion of the cartridge film.

A battery cover 22 is provided on the upper left side of the back surface 12. By opening the battery cover 22, the battery can be taken out of the main body 3 or loaded into the main body 3.

3 to 5 are exploded perspective views of the lens barrel 1. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lens barrel 1 has a fixed barrel 40 fixed to the main body 3 of the camera 2. The fixed cylinder 40 is a cylinder for accommodating the first cylinder 4, the second cylinder 5, and the third cylinder 6, and is attached to a substantially central portion of the main body 3. A helicoid screw 41 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the fixed cylinder 40. The helicoid screw 41 has a spiral unevenness. In addition, a cutout portion 42 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the fixed cylinder 40 by partially cutting the cutout in the axial direction. At the position of the notch 42, a columnar gear 43 is arranged. The columnar gear 43 is rotated by driving of a lens barrel driving motor (not shown). Reference numeral 44 in FIG. 3 denotes a shaft pin that supports the columnar gear 43.

The first cylinder 4 is accommodated inside the fixed cylinder 40. The first cylinder 4 is a cylindrical body having both ends opened, and is inserted through the fixed cylinder 40 via a rubber ring 45 for light shielding and installed. A helicoid screw 46 is provided on the rear outer peripheral surface of the first cylinder 4.
Are formed. The helicoid screw 46 has a helical unevenness, and is screwed with the helicoid screw 41 on the inner peripheral surface of the fixed cylinder 40. Gear teeth 47 are formed on a part of the rear outer peripheral surface of the first cylinder 4. The gear teeth 47 are the columnar gear 4
3 meshes. When the columnar gear 43 rotates, the first cylinder 4 rotates via the gear teeth 47, and the first cylinder 4 is extended or retracted with respect to the fixed cylinder 40 by screwing the helicoid screw 46 and the helicoid screw 41. .

A longitudinal groove 48 extending in the axial direction is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the first cylinder 4. The plurality of vertical grooves 48 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, for example, three.

As shown in FIG. 4, a rectilinear cam cylinder 50 is provided inside the first cylinder 4. The rectilinear cam cylinder 50 is a cylinder having both ends opened. On the outer periphery of the rear portion of the straight cam barrel 50,
An outwardly projecting flange portion 52 is formed. The flange portion 52 is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the first cylinder 4 and is hooked on the rear end of the first cylinder 4.

Further, a projection 53 projecting further outward is formed on the flange portion 52. The projection 53 is locked in a vertical groove 54 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the fixed cylinder 40. For this reason, the rectilinear cam cylinder 50 does not rotate and the first cylinder 4
Together with the optical axis.

A cam slit 55 is formed in the peripheral surface of the straight cam barrel 50. The cam slit 55 is a slit extending spirally on the peripheral surface of the straight cam barrel 50. Also,
A longitudinal groove 56 extending in the axial direction is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the straight cam cylinder 50.
Are formed. Also, at the rear of the straight cam barrel 50,
The contact terminal 57 is attached. The contact terminal 57 is an encoder pattern (not shown) installed in the fixed cylinder 40.
And a terminal for detecting the extended position of the lens barrel.

The second cylinder 5 is accommodated inside the straight cam cylinder 50. The second cylinder 5 is a cylindrical body having both ends opened, and is inserted through the straight cam cylinder 50 via a ring member 51 and a rubber ring 61 for light shielding. A protrusion 62 is formed on a rear outer peripheral surface of the second cylinder 5. The projection 62 engages the second cylinder 5 with the rectilinear cam cylinder 50 and is inserted into the cam slit 55 of the rectilinear cam cylinder 50.

A pin 63 is attached to the projection 62. The pin 63 is for engaging the second cylinder 5 with the first cylinder 4 and protrudes above the projection 62. The pin 63 attached to the second cylinder 5 is inserted into the vertical groove 48 of the first cylinder 4 and rotates the second cylinder 5 with the rotation of the first cylinder 4.

A cam groove 71 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the second cylinder 5. The cam groove 71 is a spirally extending groove,
A plurality is formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction, for example, six are formed.

The third cylinder 6 is accommodated inside the second cylinder 5. The third cylinder 6 is a cylinder for housing each lens group of the photographing optical system, and is a cylinder located at the tip of the lens barrel 1 when the lens barrel 1 is extended. On the rear outer peripheral surface of the third cylinder 6,
The pin 72 is attached. The pin 72 is a member that engages the third cylinder 6 with the second cylinder 5, protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the third cylinder 6, and is inserted into the cam groove 71 of the second cylinder 5. The number of pins 72 to be attached is set according to the number of cam grooves 71 formed.

At the front end of the third cylinder 6, a barrier drive ring 81, a barrier base plate 82, a barrier 83, and a barrier cover 8 are provided.
4 are sequentially attached.

Further, as shown in FIG.
The shutter unit 91 is housed. The shutter unit 91 is a unit obtained by assembling a shutter 92 and a second lens group 102. Further, a first lens group 101 is arranged in front of the shutter unit 91 of the third cylinder 6, and a third lens group 103 is arranged behind the shutter unit 91. The first lens group 101 is attached to the first lens frame 104 and fixed in the third cylinder 6.
Further, the third lens group 103 is attached to the third lens frame 106 and fixed in the third cylinder 6.

A straight key ring 11 is provided at the rear of the third cylinder 6.
1 is attached. The straight key ring 111 is formed by forming a key portion 113 extending in the axial direction on the ring portion 112, and the key portion 113 is inserted into the third cylinder 6 and installed. A flange portion 114 protruding outward is formed on the outer periphery of the rear portion of the straight key ring 111. The flange portion 114 is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the second cylinder 5 and is hooked on the rear end of the second cylinder 5.

The flange portion 114 has a projection 115 projecting outward. The protrusion 115
The straight cam cylinder 50 is locked by a vertical groove 58 formed on the inner peripheral surface.

At the rear end of the straight key ring 111, a light shielding mask 121 is attached. A light-shielding mask 122 is attached to the rear end of the straight cam barrel 50.

FIG. 6 is a schematic sectional view of a lens barrel.

In FIG. 1, a lens barrel 1 is connected to a main body 3 of a camera 2.
FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional view in a state of being housed inside. A fixed cylinder 40 is provided inside the main body 3, and the fixed cylinder 40
Accommodates the first cylinder 4. Gear teeth 47 formed on the rear outer peripheral surface of the first cylinder 4 mesh with the columnar gear 43 attached to the fixed cylinder 40.

A rectilinear cam cylinder 50 is inserted at the rear of the first cylinder 4. The projection 53 of the rectilinear cam cylinder 50 is
0 is engaged in the vertical groove 54. Therefore, the straight cam barrel 50 moves along the vertical groove 54 without rotating. The second cam 5 is housed in the straight cam cam 50. The projection 62 and the pin 63 of the second cylinder 5 penetrate the cam slit 55 of the rectilinear cam cylinder 50, and the pin 63 is inserted into the vertical groove 48 of the first cylinder 4. For this reason, the second cylinder 5 rotates with the rotation of the first cylinder 4, and is fed forward to the first cylinder 4 and the rectilinear cam cylinder 50 by the cam slit 55.

The second cylinder 5 houses a third cylinder 6. The pin 72 of the third cylinder 6 is inserted into the cam groove 71 of the second cylinder 5. Therefore, the rotation of the second cylinder 5 generates a moving force in the front-rear direction on the third cylinder 6 via the cam groove 71. The third cylinder 6 houses a straight key ring 111. The key portion 113 of the straight key ring 111 is engaged with a ridge (not shown) extending in the axial direction on the inner peripheral surface of the third cylinder 6 to prevent the rotation of the third cylinder 6 and to move only in the front-rear direction. Allow.

Inside the third cylinder 6, the first lens group 10
1, a second lens group 102 and a third lens group 103 are accommodated. First lens group 101, second lens group 102
The third lens group 103 constitutes a lens optical system, and functions as a photographing optical system of the camera 2. The first lens group 101, the second lens group 102, and the third lens group 103 are arranged along the optical axis O from the front side (subject side) from the front side (subject side). Are arranged in the order of

The first lens group 101 includes the first lens frame 10
4 and is fixed so as to close the front open end of the third cylinder 6. The third lens group 103 is attached to the third lens frame 106 and is fixed so as to close the rear open end of the third cylinder 6. Second lens group 102
Is attached to the second lens frame 105 and is assembled to the shutter unit frame 93, and the first lens group 101
And the third lens group 103. On the second lens frame 105, an arm portion 105a is formed.
A rod-shaped shaft 94 penetrates the arm portion 105a. For this reason, the second lens frame 105 is
Can be moved only in the axial direction of the shaft 94. The second lens group 10 together with the second lens frame 105
By moving 2 in the optical axis direction, focusing of the photographing optical system is performed.

In FIG. 6, the first lens group 101, the second lens group 102, and the third lens group 103 are not shown in the drawings, and the respective lenses constituting the respective groups are omitted.

As described above, by accommodating each lens group of the photographing optical system in one cylinder, that is, the third cylinder 6, it becomes easy to accurately maintain the optical axis and posture of each lens group.
Further, even when an external force is applied to the lens barrel 1, the mutual posture between the lens groups does not collapse and the optical performance is easily maintained. Further, by extending and retracting the third cylinder 6, zooming is possible, and delicate cam correction movement between the lens groups is not required, so that accurate zooming can be performed.

The second lens group 1 which is a movable lens group
02 is disposed between the first lens group 101 and the third lens group 103, which are fixed lens groups, so that the sliding portion of the second lens group 102 or the second lens frame 105, the shaft 94, the arm section 105a, etc. The moving mechanism of the second lens group 102 is shielded by the first lens group 101 and the third lens group 103. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from adhering to the sliding portion and the moving mechanism, and to surely prevent the fine focusing drive from being hindered.

A shutter 95 is provided with a motor 95.
Is attached. The motor 95 is connected to the second lens group 1
It is a drive source for moving the 02 and opening and closing the barrier 83.
In FIG. 6, the illustration of the transmission mechanism of the driving force of the motor 95 is omitted.

A detector 96 is provided in the shutter unit frame 93. The detector 96 is detection means for detecting the position of the second lens group 102, and is of an optical type. For example, a photo interrupter for detecting passage between the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit is used. In addition, the detector 9
As 6, a reflection type photo reflector may be used. The detector 96 detects that the second lens group 102 passes through a predetermined position, and detects the position of the second lens group 102 through the passage.

The detector 96 detects the position of the second lens group 102 via the position of a rectangular detection plate 105b formed on the second lens frame 105. For example, the detector 9
When the detection plate 105b exists at the detection position 96a of No. 6, the output of the detector 96 becomes high, and when the detection plate 105b does not exist at the detection position 96a, the output of the detector 96 becomes low. Therefore, the detection position 96a is set to the detection plate 105b.
When the end of the second lens group 10 passes, the output of the detector 96 switches from high to low or from low to high.
2 can be detected.

At this time, when the rear end 105c of the detection plate 105b passes through the detection position 96a of the detector 96 as shown in FIG. 7, or when the detection position 96a passes through the front end 105d of the detection plate 105b as shown in FIG. Can be detected when the vehicle passes, and one detector 96 and one detection plate 105 can be detected.
By using b, two positions of the second lens group 102 can be detected. Thereby, the size and cost of the lens barrel 1 can be reduced.

Further, by detecting the position of the second lens group 102 at two positions in this way, the second lens group 102 is detected.
It is possible to accurately set two reference positions for focusing. If these reference positions are, for example, a first reference position and a second reference position, the second lens group 10
The first reference position and the second reference position are set at a fixed distance within the second movement range. Then, a WIDE standby position (near-side standby position) of the second lens group 102 is set near the first reference position, and TE is set near the second reference position.
The LE standby position (far side standby position) is set. If the WIDE standby position and the TELE standby position are appropriately selected and set as the standby positions of the second lens group 102 according to the extension state of the third cylinder 6, the moving distance of the second lens group 102 for focusing can be reduced. The focusing can be shortened, and accurate focusing can be performed by reducing the movement error. Further, time parallax (time delay) at the time of shooting can be reduced.

The detection plate 105b has a constant width W in the optical axis direction. The width of the detection plate 105b is set in consideration of the amount of movement of the second lens group 102.
It is desirable to set it to 3 to 10 mm.

FIGS. 9 and 10 show a lens moving mechanism and a barrier opening / closing mechanism.

FIG. 9 is a sectional view of the third cylinder 6. As shown in the figure, a gear 13 is provided on the rotation shaft 95a of the motor 95.
0 is attached. The torque of the gear 130 is transmitted to the gear 134 via the gears 131, 132, and 133. These gears 130 to 134 function as a second drive transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 95 to the lens moving mechanism.

The gear 134 is attached to the upper part of the screw shaft 135. The screw shaft 135 is a rod having a thread formed on a peripheral surface thereof, and is rotatably attached to the shutter unit frame 93 in the optical axis direction. An arm 105 e extending from the second lens frame 105 is screwed to the screw shaft 135. Screw shaft 1
The arm 35 and the arm 105e function as a lens moving mechanism.

When the motor 95 rotates, the gears 130-1
The screw shaft 135 rotates via 34, and the second lens group 102 moves in the optical axis direction together with the second lens frame 105. By the movement of the second lens group 102, focusing of the photographing optical system is performed.

The upper portion of the screw shaft 135 further penetrates the front surface 93a of the shutter unit frame 93, and a gear 141 is attached to the penetrating portion. Front 93
A swing plate 142 is attached to a, and gears 143 and 144 are rotatably attached on the swing plate 142.

As shown in FIG. 10, the rocking plate 142 is supported by a shaft pin 145 of the gear 144.
5 is rotatable. The swing plate 142
Is urged counterclockwise by a torsion spring 146 when viewed from above, and is locked by a pin 147 projecting from the front surface 93a. Gear 14 on rocking plate 142
3 always meshes with the gear 144,
When the gear 2 is rotated counterclockwise by the torsion spring 146, it is separated from the gear 141 and is not meshed.

Gears 148, 149 and 150 are sequentially provided on the front surface 93a. The gear 148 is
The gear 144 meshes with the gear 144, and transmits a rotational force to the gear 150 via the gears 148 and 149 by the rotation of the gear 144. The gear 150 passes through the front wall 6 a of the third cylinder 6 and meshes with the barrier drive ring 81. That is,
The gear 150 is, as shown in FIG.
1 and is engaged with a gear tooth 81b (see FIG. 4) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 81a. Gears 130 to 134, screw shaft 135 and gears 141, 143, 144, 148-1
Reference numeral 50 functions as a first drive transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the motor 95 to the barrier opening / closing mechanism.

A stopper 6b is formed in a portion of the front wall 6a of the third cylinder 6 where the gear 150 penetrates. The stopper 6b restricts the movement range of the barrier drive ring 81, and contacts the inner wall of the elongated hole 81a by the movement of the barrier drive ring 81 to limit the movement of the barrier drive ring 81.

As shown in FIG. 9, the shutter unit frame 9
A bar 160 is attached to 3. Bar material 160
Is a rod-shaped member, which is disposed toward the optical axis direction. Further, the bar member 160 is assembled so as to be movable within a certain range in the optical axis direction, and moves in accordance with extension and retraction of the lens barrel 1. Tip 16 of bar 160
Numeral 1 has a tapered shape and is located below the rocking plate 142. Also, the rear end 162 of the bar 160
Project from the rear open end of the third cylinder 6.

When the lens barrel 1 such as the third cylinder 6 is retracted into the main body 3, the rear end 162 of the bar 160 comes into contact with the main body 3 and the like. By this contact, the bar 160 moves forward of the shutter unit frame 93. By the movement, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7, the tip 161 rotates the swinging plate 142 clockwise, and the gear 143 and the gear 141 on the swinging plate 142 mesh with each other. As a result, the driving force of the motor 95 is
1, 143, 144 and 148 to 150 are transmitted to the barrier side, and the transmission enables the barrier to be closed.

On the other hand, the lens barrel 1 such as the third cylinder 6
When the rod member 160 is unreeled more than a certain distance, the rear end portion 162 of the bar member 160 does not come into contact with the wall surface (not shown) of the main body 3. Therefore, the bar member 160 is located behind the shutter unit frame 93, and the rocking plate 142 is rotated counterclockwise. Therefore, the gear 143 and the gear 141 on the rocking plate 142 do not mesh with each other, and the driving force of the motor 95 is not transmitted to the barrier side.
2 only moves in the optical axis direction, and the barrier is not closed.

As described above, the bar 160 and the rocking plate 142
Functions as a drive transmission switching unit that switches between a transmittable state and a non-transmittable state for transmitting the driving force of the motor 95 to the barrier opening / closing mechanism.

When the gears 143 and 141 on the rocking plate 142 mesh with each other, the movement of the second lens group 102 and the opening and closing of the barrier 83 are interlocked by the driving of the motor 95 as a drive source. Therefore, by detecting the position of the second lens group 102 by the detector 96, the open / close state of the barrier 83 can be indirectly detected. For this reason, it is possible to omit the installation of a sensor or the like for detecting the opening and closing of the barrier.

Next, the basic operation of the lens barrel 1 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 6, when the camera 2 is in the off state where photographing is not possible, the lens barrel 1 is retracted into the main body 3 and the barrier 83 is closed. When the main switch 16 of the main body 3 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 11, the motor 95 is driven, the driving force is transmitted to the barrier opening / closing mechanism, and the barrier 83 is opened. The driving force of the motor 95 is also transmitted to the lens moving mechanism, and the second lens group 102 moves to the subject side.

In this state, since the lens barrel 1 is retracted, the opening and closing of the barrier 83 and the movement of the second lens group 102 are performed in conjunction with the driving of the motor 95. The second lens group 102 is stopped at the WIDE standby position.

When the shutter button 11 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 11, the lens barrel driving motor (not shown) is rotated based on the AF distance measurement data as shown in FIG. It rotates and the first cylinder 4 is extended. At this time, the motor 95 is not driven, and the first lens group 101, the second lens group 102, and the third lens group 10 are not driven.
3 are fed out entirely without changing their group spacing. The focus adjustment is performed by this whole extension. Then, a shutter release is performed, and photographing is performed. After the shutter release, the first cylinder 4 is retracted into the main body 3.

When a zoom operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 11, a lens barrel driving motor (not shown) is driven in accordance with the operation, as shown in FIG.
3 rotates, and the first cylinder 4 is unwound from the main body 3 and the fixed cylinder 40 while rotating. In addition, the second cylinder 5 together with the first cylinder 4
Also rotates and is fed out of the first cylinder 4. Further, the third cylinder 6 is extended from the second cylinder 5. From the extension of the first cylinder 4, the second cylinder 5, and the third cylinder 6, the first lens group 101,
The second lens group 102 and the third lens group 103 are moved out integrally, and zooming is performed. At this time, the second lens group 102 is waiting at the WIDE standby position.

When the shutter button 11 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 13, as shown in FIG.
The motor 95 is driven based on the F distance measurement data, the second lens group 102 retreats from the WIDE standby position, and focus adjustment is performed. Then, a shutter release is performed, and photographing is performed.

When the zoom operation is further performed in the state shown in FIG. 13, the lens barrel driving motor (not shown) is driven in accordance with the operation as shown in FIG. The one cylinder 4 is fed out from the main body 3 and the fixed cylinder 40 while rotating. Further, the second cylinder 5 rotates together with the first cylinder 4 and is fed out from the first cylinder 4. Further, the third cylinder 6 is extended from the second cylinder 5. These first cylinders 4,
From the extension of the second cylinder 5 and the third cylinder 6, the first lens group 1
01, the second lens group 102 and the third lens group 103 are fed out integrally, and zooming is performed.

At this time, when the third cylinder 6 is extended over a certain distance, the second lens group 102 is retracted from the WIDE standby position, moves to the TELE standby position, and stands by at the TELE standby position. In FIG. 15, the TELE of the second lens group 102 is shown.
The standby position is indicated by a two-dot chain line.

Here, the “extending beyond a certain value” is defined as, for example, a case where the lens barrel 1 can be extended by step zooming in seven steps Z1 to Z7, a zoom code Z2.
And the zooming-out amount between the zoom code Z3. That is, when the lens barrel 1 is fed from the zoom code Z2 to the zoom code Z3, the second lens group 102 moves from the WIDE standby position to the TELE standby position. The movement of the second lens group 102 is performed by driving a motor 95.

In this driving, since the transmission of the driving force of the motor 95 to the barrier opening / closing mechanism is interrupted by the extension of the lens barrel 1, the barrier 83 does not close even when the motor 95 is driven. .

When the shutter button 11 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 15, the motor 95 is driven based on the AF distance measurement data, and the second lens group 102
The focus is adjusted by retracting from the standby position (the position indicated by the two-dot chain line). Then, a shutter release is performed, and photographing is performed.

Next, the electrical configuration of a camera using the lens barrel 1 will be described.

FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an electric configuration of a camera using the lens barrel 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the camera 2 is provided with a CPU 200. C
The PU 200 controls the entire camera 2,
A ROM 201 in which a program for control / arithmetic processing is stored in advance and a RAM 202 for storing various data in control / arithmetic are built in.

The CPU 200 includes a boosting circuit 210, a display unit 13, a switch group 212, a remote control receiving circuit 213,
LED group 214, strobe circuit 215, photometer 216,
The shutter drive unit 217 is connected.

The boosting circuit 210 is connected to the battery 210 a, boosts the power supply voltage output from the battery 210 a under the control of the CPU 200, and applies the boosted power supply voltage to each electric component in the camera 2. Supply.

A switch group 212 includes a shutter button 11 for performing shutter release, a mode switch 14 for setting a photographing mode, a self-timer switch 15 for setting self-timer photographing, a photographable state of the camera 2, and a photographing impossible state. Main switch 16 for switching the state,
Zoom switch 18 (TELE) for performing zooming
Switch 19, WIDE switch 20), an open / close switch for opening / closing the cartridge lid 21, an MR switch for instructing rewinding of the film halfway, a cartridge presence / absence switch for checking whether or not a film cartridge is loaded, and the like. I have.

The strobe circuit 215 has a luminous body provided in the strobe window, and under the control of the CPU 200,
The illuminant emits flash light in accordance with the selected photographing mode (mode relating to the flash light emission mode or the like). Photometry unit 2
Reference numeral 16 includes the photometric sensor 9 and the like. The shutter driving unit 217 performs shutter driving,
It operates upon receiving a drive signal from the driver unit 219.

The CPU 200 has an EEPROM 2
18, a driver unit 219, an AF circuit 220, a focus drive unit 221, a lens barrel drive unit 222, and a film feed unit 22
3, DD reading unit 224, magnetic data writing / reading unit 22
5 is connected.

The EEPROM 218 stores the state of the camera 2 at each time, various control parameters, and the like. The driver unit 219 receives a control signal from the CPU 200 and outputs a drive signal to the focus drive unit 221, the lens barrel drive unit 222, the film feed unit 223, and the shutter drive unit 217. The driver unit 219 includes the CPU 20
0 driver ON / OFF terminal CE, serial terminal D
M, connected to the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2, switches the driver ON / OFF terminal CE to ON, selects a driving unit to be driven by a serial signal from the serial terminal DM, and selects the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC.
In accordance with the data signal of No. 2, the selected driving unit is driven.
When the drive of the selected drive unit is completed, driver ON / O
Turn off the FF terminal CE and turn off the driver section 219
Let it.

The AF circuit 220 has an AF light emitting window and an AF
Each light-receiving window has a light-emitting body and a light-receiving body, and the distance to the subject is measured by an instruction from the CPU 200 according to the principle of triangulation using the light-emitting body and the light-receiving body. send.

The focus driving section 221 moves the lens of the second lens group 102 and opens and closes the barrier 83, and includes a motor 95. The motor 95 is driven by receiving a drive signal from the driver unit 219, and is driven by the second lens group 1
The movement of the lens 02 and the opening and closing of the barrier 83 are performed. Also,
The focus drive unit 221 includes a drive detector 226 that outputs a pulse signal as the motor 95 rotates. As the drive detector 226, for example, a photo interrupter is used. Further, the focus drive unit 221 is provided with a detector 96 for detecting the position of the second lens group 102.

The lens barrel driving section 222 drives the lens barrel 1 to be extended and retracted.
7 is provided. The motor 227 is a motor for driving the lens barrel, and is driven by receiving a drive signal from the driver unit 219, rotates the first cylinder 4 via the columnar gear 43 and the like, and extends or retracts the lens barrel 1. The lens barrel drive unit 2
Reference numeral 22 includes a drive detector 228 that outputs a pulse signal as the motor 227 rotates. Drive detector 22
As 8, for example, a photo interrupter is used.

The film feeding section 223 feeds the film of the loaded film cartridge in the forward or reverse direction in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 200. Immediately after the film cartridge is loaded into the main body 3, the DD (data disk) reading unit 224 stores the film information (film type, film sensitivity, number of recordable frames) and the film use state recorded on the data disk of the film cartridge. (Unused / During shooting / Shooted / Developed)
Is read in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 200 and sent to the CPU 200. Here, the data disk is a disk-shaped one provided at the side end of the film cartridge, and the film information is represented by a bar code displayed on the surface of the data disk. Represent.

The magnetic data read / write unit 225 is
In accordance with the instruction of 00, writing or reading of information such as a shooting date, the number of prints, a language and a title is performed on the magnetic recording area of the film of the loaded film cartridge.

Next, each control process in the camera 2 having the lens barrel 1 will be described in detail.

First, the outline of the basic control processing of the camera 2 will be described.

FIG. 17 shows a schematic flowchart of the basic control processing of the camera 2. As shown in S10 of FIG.
Initial processing is performed by loading the battery. The initial processing is a so-called power-on reset, and includes initial settings of the CPU 200, initial settings of the ports, initial settings of the RAM 202, and EEP.
For example, the value of the ROM 218 is expanded in the RAM 202. Details of the contents will be described later. Then, S1
Then, the process proceeds to step 2, and a clock process is performed. The clock process is a process of updating the time display according to the clock count.

Then, the flow shifts to S14, where an error writing process is performed. The error writing process is performed when the error writing is requested in each process.
This is a process for writing data in a predetermined area assigned to.

Then, the flow shifts to S16, where a remote controller circuit power supply process is performed, and the flow shifts to S18, where it is determined whether or not the 250 ms timer is running. When it is determined that the 250 mS timer has not been activated, the process proceeds to S24. On the other hand, when it is determined that the 250 ms timer has been activated, the SCT process is performed (S20), and the lens barrel recovery process is performed (S22).

The SCT process is a process for detecting the presence or absence of a cartridge. The lens barrel recovery process is to return the lens barrel 1 to an appropriate position or to reset the lens barrel 1 when the lens barrel 1 is forcibly extended or retracted by a user.
Is a process of completely recalculating. Details of the lens barrel recovery processing will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S24, where branch check processing and branch processing are performed. The branch check process and the branch process are processes for determining whether a signal input by a switch operation or the like is valid and branching to a process corresponding to the input signal when the signal is valid. Then, the flow shifts to S26, where a switch process is performed. The switch process is a process of actually performing an operation according to a switch operation or the like.

Then, the flow shifts to S32, where a strobe charging process is performed. The flash charging process is a process for charging a battery. Then, the flow shifts to S34, where a standby process is performed. The contents of the standby processing will be described later. Then, after the standby process in S34 ends, the process returns to S12.

Next, the initial processing will be described.

FIGS. 18 to 20 show flowcharts of the initial processing. Initial processing is performed by the CPU 200 when the battery is loaded.
This is the process of initializing the process.

As shown in S50 of FIG.
Initial setting of 0 is performed. Next, port setting, RAM
Initial setting of 202 is performed (S52, S54). Next, predetermined data of the EEPROM 218 is stored in the RAM 202.
(S56), and it is determined whether or not the data in the EEPROM 218 has an abnormality (S58). At this time, abnormal data is rounded to a predetermined value.

Then, the flow shifts to S60, where an SCT detection process is performed. The SCT detection process is a process for detecting whether or not a film cartridge is loaded in the main body 3 of the camera 2. Then, the flow shifts to S62, where the EEPROM 2
It is determined whether or not the feeding state data (FSTATE) of No. 18 is a shooting standby state. If it is determined that the camera is not in the shooting standby state, the process proceeds to S66.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the camera is in the photographing standby state, the flow shifts to S64, where it is determined whether or not a certain numerical value "N" is set as the film count data (FCOUNT) of the EEPROM 218. If it is determined that a certain numerical value "N" is set as the film count data (FCOUNT), the process proceeds to S76.
Move to On the other hand, film count data (FCOU
When it is determined that a certain numerical value “N” has not been set as NT), the flow shifts to S66, and the EEPROM 218
It is determined whether or not a cartridge is loaded based on the data of (1).

If it is determined in S66 that no cartridge is loaded, the flag for turning off the cartridge mark in the RAM 202 is set (S68), and "none" is set as the film count data (S7).
0). Then, the “photographing standby” is stored in the EEPROM 218 as the feeding state data (FSTATE) of the camera 2.
Is written and "None" is used as the film count data.
Is written (S72). Further, the EEPROM 218
The shutter speed and the film type are written with constant values as initial data.

In S76, it is determined whether or not the feeding state data (FSTATE) of the EEPROM 218 is in the middle of DEP / DD. Here, "during DEP / DD" means, for example, when the type of film (sensitivity, negative / positive, etc.) and the use status are being read when the cartridge is loaded.
When it is determined in S76 that DEP / DD is being performed, the process proceeds to S74.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during DEP / DD, the flow shifts to S78, and it is determined whether or not the feeding state data of the EEPROM 218 is during photographing MR. Here, “during imaging MR” means that manual rewinding is being performed during imaging. If it is determined in S78 that the photographing MR is being performed, the flow shifts to S80, where the film count data (F
It is determined whether or not a numerical value “N” is set as (COUNT). When it is determined that a certain numerical value “N” is not set as the film count data,
The process proceeds to S100.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S80 that a certain numerical value "N" is set as the film count data, the flow shifts to S82 to determine whether a value equal to or greater than "2" is set as the film count data in the EEPROM 218. It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that a value equal to or greater than "2" is set as the film count data, the flow shifts to S86, where a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the previous value is set as the film count data. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of “2” or more is not set as the film count data, the process proceeds to S84, and “1” is set as the film count data.

Then, the flow shifts to S88, where the values set in the RAM 202 as the feed state data and the film count data are written to the EEPROM 218.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S78 that the imaging MR is not being performed, the flow shifts to S90, where the EEPROM 21
Then, it is determined whether or not the feeding state data of No. 8 is under rewrite MR. Here, "during rewrite MR" means that magnetic information is being rewritten.

Then, the flow shifts to S100, where the film count value is displayed on the display section 13. Then, the flow shifts to S102, where "OFF mode" is set as the date mode, and the flow shifts to S104, where the film count data (F
COUNT) is “none”. If the film count data is determined to be "none", the process proceeds to S1.
Move to 10. On the other hand, when it is determined that the film count data is not “none”, the process proceeds to S106,
A date display is performed. That is, “−−−−−” is displayed on the display unit 13 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the main body 3 as the date display of the OFF mode. Then
The flow shifts to S108, and after waiting for 1 second, shifts to S110.

At S110, an initial valve closing process is performed. The initial valve closing process is a process of closing a shutter built in the lens barrel 1. Next, power on / off temperature measurement processing is performed (S112 in FIG. 19), and an open code is set in the RAM 202 as a main switch state (S11).
4), an encoder check process is performed (S11)
5). The power on / off temperature measurement process is performed by the focus driving unit 22.
This is a process for performing temperature measurement for driving of No. 1 (see FIG. 16). In the encoder check process, the encoder check process is a process of reading the terminals EA and EB of the encoder installed in the lens barrel 1 in order to determine the current barrel position.

Then, the flow shifts to S116, where it is determined whether both inputs of the terminals EA and EB detected by the encoder check process are "1" or not. The case where the inputs of the terminals EA and EB are both “1” is the case where the lens barrel is completely retracted into the main body 3. When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", the flow shifts to S118, and focus initial processing is performed. The focus initial process (FOCUS initial process) is a process for detecting the position of the second lens group 102 and then closing the barrier. The details will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not "1", the flow shifts to S120, where a close process (CLOSE process) is performed. The closing process is a process of moving the lens barrel 1 up to the zoom code Z1 that sets the terminals EA and EB to “1”. The details of the closing process will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S122, after performing the encoder check process, it is determined whether or not both the terminals EA and EB detected by the encoder check process are "1" (S124). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not “1”, the process proceeds to S140. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are “1”, the flow shifts to S126, and focus initial processing is performed.

Then, the flow shifts to S128, where it is determined whether a focus error has been set or not. If the focus error has been set, the encoder position is set to E1 (S130), and the lens barrel position is set to Z1 (S132). On the other hand, when the focus error has not been set, the encoder position is set to E0 (S134), and the lens barrel position is set to Z0 (S13).
6), the lens barrel error is reset (S138).

Then, the flow shifts to S140, where a close code is set in the RAM 202 as a main switch state.
Then, the flow shifts to S142, where it is determined whether the LPIIN overtime has been set. Here, "L
“PIIN” means an input from the drive detector 226 (see FIG. 16) of the focus drive unit 221 and “LPII”.
"N overtime" means that a certain set time has elapsed.

If it is determined in S142 that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S144, where focus error recovery processing is performed. The focus error recovery process is a process for recovering the state where the gears do not mesh well, such as when the second lens group 102 is moved to the WIDE standby position. Details of the processing content will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S142 that the LPIIN overtime has not been set,
The flow shifts to 146, where "5" is set as the count data n. Then, the flow shifts to S148, where a battery check process (BC process) is performed. The battery check process is a process for checking the voltage of the battery 210a.

Then, the flow shifts to S150, where it is determined whether the battery check is NG. If it is determined that the battery check is NG, after waiting for 200 ms (S152), the count data n is reduced by 1 (S154). And
It is determined whether or not the count data n is “0” (S156). If it is determined that the count data n is not “0”, the process returns to S148. On the other hand, when it is determined that the count data n is “0”, the flow shifts to S158, where it is determined whether the MR switch is turned on. When the MR switch is turned on, an MR switch process is performed, and the film is forcibly wound.

On the other hand, in S150, the battery check
When it is determined that the cartridge is not G, the process proceeds to S162 and S164, and it is determined whether or not a cartridge is loaded. When it is determined that the cartridge is not loaded, the flow shifts to S170 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cartridge is loaded, it is determined whether the cartridge cover 21 is open (S16).
6). If it is determined that the cartridge cover 21 is not open, the flow shifts to S170 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cartridge lid 21 is open,
Then, the flow shifts to 68, where a spool key moving process is performed. The spool key moving process is a process of moving the position of the spool key to the position of “x”.

Then, the flow shifts to S170 in FIG. 20, to execute EE
The feed state data (FSTATE) of the PROM 218 is D
It is determined whether EP / DD is being performed. DEP / DD
If it is determined that the cartridge is in the middle, the process proceeds to S174, the date display is performed, the VEI processing is performed, and the use display of the cartridge is set to the exposed state (S176), and S212 is performed.
Move to

On the other hand, when it is determined in S170 that the current state is not during DEP / DD, it is determined whether or not the feeding state data of the EEPROM 218 is during VEI (S17).
2). If it is determined that VEI is being performed, S174
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that VEI is not being performed, the flow shifts to S178, and it is determined whether or not the feeding state data of the EEPROM 218 is n blinking. here,
“N blinking” means that a feeding error has occurred in the camera 2.

If it is determined in step S178 that n is blinking, the flow shifts to step S204, where "exposed" is written in the EEPROM 218 as data of the VEI processing stop position, and is set in the RAM 202 as film count data (FCOUNT). Value is EEPROM2
18 is written.

Then, the flow shifts to S206, where a date display is performed, and it is determined whether or not a shutter error has been set (S208). If it is determined that the shutter error has been set, the flow shifts to S212.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the shutter error has not been set, a rewind feeding process is performed (S21).
0). The rewind feeding process is a process of winding all the film.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S178 that the feeding state data of the EEPROM 218 is not blinking n,
It is determined whether or not the feeding state data is during MR (manual rewind). When it is determined that the MR is being performed, the process proceeds to S204. On the other hand, when it is determined that the MR is not being performed, the flow shifts to S184, and the EEPROM is operated.
It is determined whether the feed state data at 218 is in FFS (Fast Frame Set). When it is determined that the FFS is being performed, the process proceeds to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S182 that the FFS is not being performed, the flow shifts to S184, where the EEPROM 2
It is determined whether the feeding state data of No. 18 indicates that the frame is being fed. If it is determined that the feeding state data is being fed, the process proceeds to S186, and it is determined whether the film count data is “0” or “1”. When it is determined that the film count data is “0” or “1”, the process proceeds to S204. On the other hand, when it is determined that the film count data is not “0” or “1”, the flow shifts to S188, and after displaying the date, VE
"Exposed" is EEPR as data of I processing stop position
OM218, and the film count data (F
The value set in the RAM 202 as COUNT) is written to the EEPROM 218 (S190). Then, the flow shifts to S192, where a process for feeding one frame of film is performed.

If it is determined in S184 that the feeding state data is not in the frame feeding state, the flow shifts to S194 to determine whether or not the feeding state data in the EEPROM 218 is in the rewrite feeding state. If it is determined that the feeding state data is being rewritten, the process proceeds to S188. On the other hand, when it is determined that the feeding state data is not during rewriting feeding, the flow shifts to S196, and it is determined whether or not the film count data is “0”. ,
If it is determined that the film count data is not "0", the flow shifts to S212. On the other hand, when it is determined that the film count data is “0”, the display unit 1
13 are displayed for 3 seconds (S198 to S202).

Then, the flow shifts to S212, where a battery check process is carried out, and it is determined whether a cartridge is loaded in the main body 3 or not. When the cartridge is loaded, the cartridge mark on the display unit 13 is turned on (S21).
6). If it is not loaded, the process moves to S218,
The date is displayed, and the initial processing ends.

Next, the release process will be described.

FIGS. 21 to 25 show flowcharts of the release process. The release process is a process performed when the shutter button 11 is operated.

As shown in S300 of FIG.
It is determined whether or not a lens barrel error flag is set to 02. When it is determined that the lens barrel error flag is set, the flow shifts to S462 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error flag is not set, a shutter battery check is set (S302). Then, a battery check process is performed (S304), and the shutter battery check is reset (S306).

Then, the flow shifts to S308, where it is determined whether the battery check is NG or not. When it is determined that the battery check is NG, S46 in FIG.
Move to 2. On the other hand, when it is determined that the battery check is not NG, the temperature measurement process (S310), the photometry process (S312), the AF process (S314), the extension calculation (S316), and the exposure calculation (S318) are sequentially performed.

The temperature measurement process is a process for measuring the temperature, the photometry process is a process for measuring the external brightness, and the AF process (autofocus process) is a process for measuring the distance to the subject. The extension calculation is a process of calculating the amount of movement of the second lens group 102 for focus adjustment according to the measurement result of the AF process. Further, the exposure calculation is a process of calculating an exposure time due to opening of a shutter according to a measurement result of the photometric processing and the like, and calculating a flash emission time.

Then, the flow shifts to S320, where it is determined whether flash emission is to be performed or not. If it is determined that strobe light is not to be emitted, the flow shifts to S324. On the other hand, when it is determined that strobe light emission is to be performed, it is determined whether or not strobe charging has been completed (S32).
2). If it is determined that the flash charging has not been completed, the flow shifts to S462 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the flash charging has been completed, the flow shifts to S324, where it is determined whether or not the film count data (FCOUNT) is "none". If it is determined that the film count data is "none", the flow shifts to S328. When it is determined that the film count data is not “none”, the ISO sensitivity and the film type of the film are displayed on the display unit 13.

Then, the flow shifts to S328, where the auto focus LED (AFLED) is turned on, and after waiting for 100 μs (S330), the flow shifts to S332, where it is determined whether or not the short distance warning is set.

When it is determined that the short distance warning has been set, the auto focus LED (AFLED)
It is determined whether or not is turned on (S334). If it is determined that it is turned on, it is turned off (S336), and if it is determined that it is not turned on, it is turned on (S33).
8). This causes the autofocus LED to blink until SP2 is pressed or SP1 is turned off.

Then, the flow shifts to S 340, where the switch SP
It is determined whether 1 is on. Switch SP1
Is a switch for detecting whether or not the shutter button 11 is half-pressed, and is turned on when the shutter button 11 is half-pressed.

If it is determined in S340 that the switch SP1 is not on, the autofocus LED is turned off (S344), and the flow shifts to S446 in FIG.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the switch SP1 is on, it is determined whether the switch SP2 is on (S346). The switch SP2 is a shutter button 11
Is a switch for detecting whether or not the shutter button 11 is fully pressed, and is turned on when the shutter button 11 is fully pressed.

If it is determined in S346 that the switch SP2 is not on, the flow returns to S322. On the other hand, when it is determined that the switch SP2 is on, the autofocus LED is turned off (S348), and the flow shifts to S350 in FIG.

In S350, the lens drive processing (LD
Processing) is performed. The lens drive processing is performed in S of FIG.
This is a process of moving the entire lens barrel 1 or the second lens group 102 in accordance with the result of the extension calculation in 316. The details will be described later. Then, the flow shifts to S352, where it is determined whether a lens barrel error flag is set or not. When it is determined that the lens barrel error flag is set, the flow shifts to S386.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error flag is not set, the lens drive NG (L
DNG) is determined (S3).
54). When it is determined that the lens drive NG is set, the flow shifts to S356, where it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime. The PI overtime means that an overtime has occurred in the PI signal of the lens barrel motor or the focus motor. If it is determined in S356 that it is not the PI overtime, the flow shifts to S386. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the PI overtime, the flow shifts to S358, where a lens return process (LR process) is performed. The lens return process is a process of returning the lens barrel 1 or the second lens group 102 moved by the lens drive process to a predetermined standby position. The details will be described later. After the lens return processing in S358, the flow shifts to S386.

On the other hand, in S354, the lens drive NG
When it is determined that is not set, the PRE processing (S360), the CHP reading processing (S362), the power-on processing (S364), the exposure processing (S366), the power-off processing (S368), and the power-supply complete set (S370) Are sequentially performed. The PRE process is a process of blinking a strobe before exposure according to whether the shooting mode is the red-eye reduction mode. The CHP reading process is a process of reading a print type selection. The exposure processing is performed in step S318 in FIG.
This is a process for performing shutter release according to the exposure calculation result.

Then, the flow shifts to S372, where it is determined whether an exposure error has occurred. If it is determined that there is no exposure error, the shutter error is reset (S374). On the other hand, when it is determined that an exposure error has occurred, it is determined whether a certain numerical value “N” is set as the film count data (FCOUNT) in the EEPROM 218 (S376).

If it is determined that a certain numerical value "N" is not set as the film count data, the process proceeds to S3
The process moves to 74. On the other hand, when it is determined that a certain numerical value “N” is set as the film count data,
"1" is added to the shutter error count data (S378). Then, the flow shifts to S380, where it is determined whether the shutter error count is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. If it is determined that the shutter error count is not equal to or larger than the predetermined set value, the flow shifts to S374. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the shutter error count is equal to or larger than the predetermined set value, a shutter error is set (S3).
82), error writing is set (S384).

Then, the flow shifts to S386, where a lens return process is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not an exposure error has occurred (S388). If it is determined that there has been no exposure error, the flow shifts to S390, where it is determined whether or not a lens barrel error has occurred. If it is determined that there is no lens barrel error, the flow shifts to S398. On the other hand, if it is determined in S388 that an exposure error has occurred, and if it is determined in S390 that a lens barrel error has occurred, the shooting mode of the camera 2 is set to the distant view mode (INF) or the night view mode (NVP).
Is determined (S392, S394). When it is determined that the shooting mode of the camera 2 is the distant view mode (INF) or the night view mode (NVP), the shooting mode is set to the normal mode (DP mode) and the display unit 1
3 is displayed (S396). On the other hand, the shooting mode of the camera 2 is a distant view mode (INF) or a night view mode (NVP).
When it is determined that none of the above conditions is satisfied, the flow shifts to S398.

At S398, clock processing is performed. Then, a date display (S400), an error writing process (S400)
402) is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not a shutter error has occurred (S404). If it is determined that there has been no shutter error, the process proceeds to S410. On the other hand, when it is determined that a shutter error has occurred, a predetermined mark blinks on the display unit 13 (S406),
The user or the like can know the shutter error.

Then, the flow shifts to S 408, where “exposed” is indicated as data of the VEI processing stop position in the EEPROM 21.
8 and the film count data (FCOUN
The value set in the RAM 202 as T) is EEP
The data is written to the ROM 218.

Then, the flow shifts to S410, where it is determined whether or not the lens drive is NG. Lens drive NG
If it is determined that is, the flow shifts to S458 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the lens drive NG, the flow shifts to S414, where it is determined whether or not the film count data (FCOUNT) is "none". If it is determined that the film count data is "none", the flow shifts to S428 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the film count data is not “none”, it is determined whether or not the VEI processing stop position (EVIPARK) is “exposed” (EXPOSED) (S416).

If it is determined that the VEI processing stop position is "exposed", the flow shifts to S422. On the other hand, when it is determined that the VEI processing stop position is not “exposed”, “partial shooting” (PARTIAL) is set as the data of the VEI processing stop position (S4).
18), RAM 20 as VEI processing stop position data
2 is written in the EEPROM 218, and the value set in the RAM 202 as the film count data (FCOUNT) is stored in the EEPROM 218.
218 (S420).

Then, the flow shifts to S422, where it is determined whether the cartridge cover 21 is open (SCC = open). When it is determined that the cartridge lid 21 is open, the flow shifts to S428 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cartridge lid 21 is not open, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing of the cartridge lid 21 has changed (the SCC has changed) (S424).

If it is determined that the opening / closing of the cartridge lid 21 has changed, the flow shifts to S428 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no change in the opening / closing of the cartridge lid 21, the process proceeds to S426, and the EEPROM 218 stores
"Shooting frame feeding" is written as the feeding state data (FSTATE) of the camera 2, and the film count data set in the RAM 202 is written as the film count data (S72).

Then, the flow shifts to S428 in FIG. 24, where it is determined whether the shooting mode of the camera 2 is the distant view mode (INF) or the night view mode (NVP) (S428, S).
430). When the shooting mode of the camera 2 is the distant view mode (IN
If it is determined that the mode is F) or the night scene mode (NVP), the shooting mode is set to the normal mode (DP mode) and displayed on the display unit 13 (S432). On the other hand, when it is determined that the shooting mode of the camera 2 is neither the distant view mode (INF) nor the night view mode (NVP), the process proceeds to S434.

In S434, a photographing completion display is performed.
The completion of shooting is indicated by the auto focus LED (AFLE
D), by turning on a self-mode LED (SELFLED). And the cartridge lid 2
It is determined whether or not 1 has been erroneously opened and closed (S436). When it is determined that the cartridge cover 21 has been erroneously opened / closed, the flow shifts to S458 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the cartridge lid 21 has not been
A frame feeding process is performed (S438).

Then, it is determined whether or not the cartridge lid 21 has been erroneously opened and closed (S440). Cartridge lid 2
1 is determined to have been erroneously opened and closed, the process proceeds to S4 in FIG.
Go to 58. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cartridge cover 21 has not been erroneously opened and closed, it is determined whether or not an exposure error has occurred (S442). If it is determined that an exposure error has occurred, the flow shifts to S458 in FIG.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no exposure error, a flash charging process is performed (S444).

At S446 in FIG. 25, a date display is performed. After the power-off process (S448), the flash charging process (S450), and the clock process (S452), it is determined whether the self-switch is turned on (S45).
4) If it is turned on, the process returns to S452. If it is not turned on, the process shifts to S456 to determine whether or not charging completion is set.

When it is determined that the charging completion is set, the flow shifts to S462, and when it is determined that the charging completion is not set, the flow shifts to S458.

In S458, a date display is performed. Then, after the flash charging process (S460) and the clock process (S462), it is determined whether the half-press of the shutter button is released (SP1 is turned off) (S46).
4). When it is determined that the half-press of the shutter button has not been released, the process returns to S462. On the other hand, when it is determined that the half-press of the shutter button has been released, the release processing ends.

Next, the main switch processing will be described.

FIG. 26 shows a flowchart of the main switch processing. The main switch processing is performed by the main switch 1
This is the process when the operation of No. 6 is performed.

As shown in S500 of FIG. 26, it is determined whether or not the encoder position is at the encoder code E0. Here, "Encoder position is encoder code E0
"Means that the lens barrel 1 is retracted into the main body 3 and the barrier 83 is closed. When it is determined that the encoder position is not the encoder code E0, the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder position is the encoder code E0, an encoder check process is performed (S502). As described above, the encoder check process is a process of reading the terminals EA and EB of the encoder installed on the lens barrel 1 in order to determine the current barrel position.

Then, the flow shifts to S504, where it is determined whether or not both of the terminals EA, EB detected by the encoder check processing are "1". If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not "1", the flow shifts to S508, where the SM closing process is performed. The SM closing process is a process of retracting the lens barrel 1 into the main body 3 and closing the barrier 83. Details of this processing content will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S504 that both of the terminals EA and EB are “1”, the SM opening process is performed (S506). The SM opening process is a process of opening the barrier 83. Details of this processing content will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S510, where a clock process is performed, after which it is determined whether the main switch has been pressed or not (S512). When it is determined that the main switch has been pressed, the process returns to S510. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main switch has not been pressed, the main switch process ends.

Next, the SM opening process will be described.

FIG. 27 shows a flowchart of the SM opening process. The SM opening process is performed by operating the main switch 16.
It performs processing such as opening a barrier.

As shown in S550 of FIG. 27, the recovery prohibition flag is reset and the SM open battery check flag is set (S552). Then, a battery check process is performed (S554), and the SM open battery check flag is reset.

Then, it is determined whether or not the battery check is NG. If the battery check is NG, the process proceeds to S56.
Move to 6. On the other hand, when it is determined that the battery check is not NG, the film count display (S56)
0), power on / off temperature measurement processing (S562), and open processing (S564). The open process is a process of opening a barrier, and details of the content will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S566, where it is determined whether the encoder position is at the encoder code E0 or not.
If it is determined that the encoder position is not the encoder code E0, it is determined that the open processing has been normally performed, and the flow shifts to S508, where a shooting mode display is performed. Here, "shooting mode display" refers to the display of a mark indicating the selected shooting mode. For example, no display is set in the auto mode, and an eye mark is displayed in the red-eye reduction mode.

Then, the flow shifts to S570, for switch group 2
12 (see FIG. 16), the input port is set. With this set of input ports, each switch can be input.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S566 that the encoder position is not the encoder code E0, it is determined that the barrier 83 is not normally opened by the open processing, and the encoder check processing is performed (S57).
2). Then, it is determined whether both of the terminals EA and EB detected in the encoder check process are “1” (S574). If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not "1", the flow shifts to S568. On the other hand, terminal EA,
When it is determined that both the EBs are “1”, the recovery prohibition flag is set (S576). And
The flow shifts to S578, where an output port is set for the switch group 212 (see FIG. 16). By setting this output port, input to each switch is prohibited. S578
After the processing of S570, the SM opening processing ends.

Next, the SM closing process will be described.

FIG. 28 shows a flowchart of the SM closing process. The SM closing process is a process of retracting the lens barrel 1 into the main body 3 by operating the main switch 16 and closing the barrier.

As shown in S600 of FIG.
It is determined whether or not the shooting mode is the red-eye reduction mode (PRE mode). When it is determined that the shooting mode of the camera 2 is the red-eye reduction mode, the process proceeds to S604. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shooting mode of the camera 2 is not the red-eye reduction mode, the shooting mode is set to the normal mode (D
(P mode) (S602).

Then, the flow shifts to S604, where the charge completion flag is reset, and then the recovery prohibition flag is set (S606). Then, the data of the current lens barrel position is set as the data of the past lens barrel position (S60).
8) The power on / off temperature measurement process is performed (S610), and the close process is performed (S612). The closing process is
This is a process of rolling the lens barrel 1 into the main body 3, and details of the content will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S614, where it is determined whether the encoder position is at the encoder code E1.
Here, “the encoder position is at the encoder code E1” means that the lens barrel 1 is retracted into the main body 3 and the barrier 83 is open. When it is determined that the encoder position is not the encoder code E1, the process proceeds to S644, where the open code is set as the main switch state, and the input port is set for the switch group 212 (see FIG. 16) (S646).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S614 that the encoder position is at the encoder code E1, an encoder check process is performed (S616). And
The flow shifts to S618, where it is determined whether the terminals EA, EB detected in the encoder check process are both "1" or not. If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not "1", the flow shifts to S644.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S618 that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", it is determined whether or not a focus error has been set (S62).
0). When it is determined that the focus error has been set, the flow shifts to S624, where focus initial processing is performed. The focus initial processing is performed in the second lens group 102
This is a process of checking the position of the (focus) position and performing barrier closing processing. The barrier closing process is a process of closing the barrier 83. The details of the processing contents of the focus initial processing and the barrier closing processing will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S620 that the focus error has not been set, it is determined whether or not a lens barrel error has been set (S622).

If it is determined that a lens barrel error has been set, the flow shifts to S624. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error has not been set, the barrier closing process is performed (S626).

Then, the flow shifts to S628, where it is determined whether the LPIIN overtime has been set.
When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, focus error recovery processing is performed (S630). On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, it is determined whether a focus error has been set (S63).
2). When it is determined that the focus error has been set, the SM closing process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus error has not been set, E0 is set as encoder position data (S63).
4), Z0 is set as lens barrel position data (S63)
6), the lens barrel error is reset (S638), and a closed code is set as the main switch state (SM state) (S640).

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S642, where a switch group 2
12 (see FIG. 16), the output port is set. By setting this output port, input to each switch is prohibited. After the processing of S642 and S646, the SM closing processing ends.

Next, the standby processing will be described.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the standby process. Standby processing is performed after each switch processing, etc.
This processing is performed when there is no switch operation.

As shown in S700 of FIG. 29, the values of the standby counter and the wait mode 1 counter are
Zero is set. Then, in S702, 250 ms
After the timer is started, it is determined whether or not there is a switch input (S704). When it is determined that there is a switch input, the standby processing ends, and the processing shifts to each switch processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S704 that there is no switch input, clock processing (S706) and lens barrel recovery check processing (S708) are sequentially performed. Details of the lens barrel recovery check processing will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S710, where it is determined whether the standby counter is at a predetermined value A set in advance. As the set value A, for example, a value corresponding to 5 minutes is set. When it is determined that the value of the standby counter is not the set value A, 1 is added as the value of the standby counter (S712), and the process returns to S702. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the standby counter has the predetermined set value A, it is determined whether the auto-WIDE completed flag is set (S714).

When it is determined that the auto WIDE completed flag is not set, the auto WIDE process is performed (S716). The contents of the auto WIDE processing will be described later. Then, the flow shifts to S717, where an auto W
The IDE-completed flag is set, and the process returns to S702.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S714 that the auto-WIDE completed flag is set, it is determined whether the wait mode 1 counter is at a predetermined set value B which is set in advance ( S718). As the set value B, for example, a value corresponding to 8 to 10 minutes is set. When it is determined that the wait mode 1 counter is not the set value B, 1 is added as the value of the wait mode 1 counter (S720), and the process returns to S702.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S718 that the wait mode 1 counter has the set value B, it is determined whether or not the auto-off completed flag is set. If it is determined that the auto-off flag is set, the process returns to S702. On the other hand, when it is determined that the auto-off completed flag is not set, an auto-off process is performed (S724). In the auto-off process, similarly to the SM closing process, the lens barrel 1 is moved to the main body 3.
And closing the barrier. And S7
26, the auto-off completed flag is set,
It returns to S702.

Next, the automatic WIDE processing will be described.

FIG. 30 shows a flowchart of the automatic WIDE processing. The auto WIDE process is a process that is performed when the camera 2 is in a standby state and a predetermined time has elapsed without a switch operation.

As shown in S750 of FIG. 30, the camera 2
It is determined whether or not the shooting mode is the red-eye reduction mode (PRE mode). If it is determined that the shooting mode of the camera 2 is the red-eye reduction mode, the flow shifts to S754. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shooting mode of the camera 2 is not the red-eye reduction mode, the shooting mode is set to the normal mode (D
(P mode) (S752).

Then, the flow shifts to S754, where the self mode is reset, and it is determined whether an open code has been set as the main switch state (S756). When it is determined that the open code has not been set, the automatic WIDE processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the open code is set, it is determined whether or not a lens barrel error is set (S758). When the lens barrel error is set, lens barrel error processing is performed (S760). The lens barrel error process is a process of retracting the lens barrel 1 into the main body 3, closing the barrier, and confirming the encoder position.

On the other hand, if the lens barrel error is not set in S758, the encoder check processing (S7
After performing 62), it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB of the encoder are intermediate codes (S764). Here, the “intermediate code” is a code assigned to the terminals EA and EB when the extension position of the lens barrel is between the predetermined zoom code (Zn) and the zoom code (Zn + 1).

At S764, encoder code EA,
If it is determined that the EB is an intermediate code, S76
Move to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB of the encoder are not intermediate codes, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is at the zoom code Z1 (S766).
When it is determined that the lens barrel position is at the zoom code Z1, the automatic WIDE processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is not the zoom code Z1, Z1 is set as the lens barrel stop position (S768).

Then, the flow shifts to S770, where a lens barrel 1 is selected.
Is a zoom code Z1 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "Z1").
It is repeated until. Then, the recovery prohibition is set, and the automatic WIDE processing ends.

Next, the lens barrel recovery check processing will be described.

FIG. 31 shows a flowchart of the lens barrel recovery check processing. The lens barrel recovery check process is a process performed when the camera 2 is in a standby state.
In this process, the encoder is read at the start of every 50 ms, and if the position of the lens barrel has moved to a position other than the zoom code, a state setting for driving the lens barrel is performed.

As shown in S800 of FIG. 31, it is determined whether the recovery prohibition flag is set.
When the recovery prohibition flag is set, the lens barrel recovery check processing ends. On the other hand, when the recovery prohibition flag is not set, the intermediate code error is reset (S802), and the lens barrel recovery is reset (S804).

Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is at Z1 (S806). When it is determined that the lens barrel position is at Z1, recovery is impossible, and the lens barrel recovery check processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is not Z1, it is determined whether or not the battery check is NG (S808).

If it is determined in S808 that the battery check is NG, the lens barrel recovery check processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the battery check is not NG, the encoder overtime counter is set to "10" (S810), and the terminals EA and EB of the encoder are set to the input ports (S812).
After waiting for 100 μs (S814), the terminal E of the encoder is
A and EB are read (S816).

Then, the terminals EA and EB of the encoder are set to the output ports (S818), and it is determined whether or not the previous code in the encoder matches the code read this time (S820). If it is determined that the previous code in the encoder matches the code read this time, the process moves to S830. on the other hand,
If the previous code in the encoder does not match the code read this time, the value of the encoder overtime counter is decremented by one (S822), and it is determined whether the value of the encoder overtime counter is zero (S824). ). When it is determined that the value of the encoder overtime counter is not zero, S81
Return to 2.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the encoder overtime counter is zero, the flow shifts to S826, where the encoder detection overtime is set, and then both the encoder terminals EA and EB are set to zero ( S828).

Then, the flow shifts to S830, where it is determined whether both terminals EA and EB of the encoder are zero or not.
When it is determined that one of the terminals EA and EB of the encoder is not zero, it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S832). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the lens barrel recovery check processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, an intermediate code error flag is set (S836), and the lens barrel recovery check processing ends.

On the other hand, in S830, the terminal E of the encoder is
When it is determined that either A or EB is zero, it is determined that the zoom code is out of the zoom code Zn, a lens barrel recovery flag is set (S834), and the lens barrel recovery check processing ends.

As described above, according to the lens barrel recovery check process, the encoder is read every 250 ms, and if the position of the lens barrel has moved to a position other than the zoom code, the state for driving the lens barrel is determined. By performing the setting, it is possible to detect that the lens barrel 1 is pulled out or pushed in due to an external factor.

Next, the outline of the operation of the motor control logic and the lens barrel will be described.

FIG. 32 shows control signals for the lens barrel driving motor and the second lens group driving motor. The motor for driving the lens barrel and the motor for driving the second lens group are CPU
The driving is performed by a driving signal output from the driver unit 219 based on the control signal of 200.

The motor for driving the lens barrel and the motor for driving the second lens group are driven by the driver ON / O of the CPU 200.
After the motor to be driven is selected by the selection signal output from the FF terminal CE, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
The drive content is determined according to the logic output from C2.

For example, as shown in FIG. 32, when DC0 is 0, DC1 is 0, DC2 is 0, and when DC0 is 0,
When C1 is 0 and DC2 is 1, the motor 95 for driving the lens barrel or the motor 227 for driving the second lens group is in a standby state. When DC0 is 0, DC1 is 1 and DC2 is 1, normal rotation driving, that is, driving in the TELE direction is performed. When DC0 is 1, DC1 is 0, and DC2 is 1, reverse drive, that is, drive in the WIDE direction is performed. DC0 is 1, DC1 is 1,
When DC2 is 1, the brake operation is performed.

FIG. 33 shows an outline of the operation of the lens barrel 1.

As shown in this figure, the position where the lens barrel 1 can be stopped in the zoom drive is the position of the zoom code Zn. As the zoom code Zn, for example, Z1 to Z7 are set. An encoder Em code is assigned corresponding to the zoom codes Z1 to Z7. Em codes E0 and E1 are assigned to the zoom code Z1. The code E0 is a code when the lens barrel is stopped at the zoom code Z1 and the barrier 83 is closed. The code E1 is a code when the lens barrel is stopped at the zoom code Z1 and the barrier 83 is open.

The E2 Em code is assigned to the zoom code Z2, the E3 Em code is assigned to the zoom code Z3, and the E4 E code is assigned to the zoom code Z4.
m code is assigned, and E5 is assigned to the zoom code Z5.
Is assigned to the zoom code Z6.
An Em code of E6 is assigned, and an Em code of E7 is assigned to the zoom code Z7. An intermediate code is allocated between the zoom codes Zn.

As shown in FIG. 33A, in the open processing, only the operation of opening the barrier 83 is performed.
Is not performed. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the closing process, driving of any one of the zoom codes Zn to Z1 is performed, and the barrier 83 is closed.
As shown in FIG. 3C, in the TELE drive, a drive in which the lens barrel is extended from any one of the zoom codes Zn is performed. As shown in FIG. 4D, in the WIDE drive, a drive in which the lens barrel is retracted from one of the zoom codes Zn is performed. In this case, a stop by the drive from the WIDE side after passing through the zoom code Zn to be stopped, that is, a zoom offset is performed.

[0208] As shown in Fig. 5 (5), in the lens drive 1 process, the entire lens barrel is driven out from Z1. As shown in FIG. 6 (6), in the lens return 1 process, the lens barrel extended from Z1 is driven into Z1. As shown in FIG. 7 (7), in the lens barrel error processing, a drive for rolling the lens barrel moved to the intermediate code to Z1 is performed, and the barrier 83 is closed. As shown in FIG. 8 (8), in the lens barrel recovery processing, the zoom code Z
A drive is performed to return to the original zoom code Zn when it moves out of n and moves on the codes at both ends.

Next, the open processing will be described.

FIG. 34 shows a flowchart of the open process. The open process is a process of opening the barrier 83 according to the operation of the main switch 16.

As shown in S850 of FIG. 34, it is determined whether or not the encoder position is at code E0. When it is determined that the encoder position is not the code E0,
The flow shifts to 852, where a lens barrel error flag is set and S
868. On the other hand, when the encoder position is the code E0
Is determined, an encoder check process is performed (S854).

Thereafter, the flow shifts to S856, where terminals EA, E
It is determined whether B is 1, 1 or not. Terminal EA,
If it is determined that both the EBs are not 1 and 1, S85
Move to 2. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are 1 and 1, the barrier opening process is performed (S
858). The barrier opening process is a process of driving the motor 95 of the focus driving unit 221 to open the barrier 83.
The details of the barrier opening process will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S860, where it is determined whether an open code has been set as the main switch state. If it is determined that the open code is not set, it is determined that the barrier 83 is not open, and S868
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the open code is set, E1 is set as the encoder position (S862), and Z1 is set as the lens barrel position (S86).
864), the lens barrel error flag is reset (S8).
66).

Then, the flow shifts to S868, where a recovery prohibition flag is set and the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set.
Is set to low and the driver unit 219 is not operated (S870), and the open processing ends.

Next, the closing process will be described.

FIGS. 35 and 36 show flowcharts of the closing process. The closing process is a process of moving the lens barrel 1 to the zoom code Z1 and closing the barrier 83 in accordance with the operation of the main switch 16.

As shown in S900 of FIG. 35, it is determined whether or not the encoder position is at code E1. When it is determined that the encoder position is the code E1,
The process proceeds to 902, where an encoder check process is performed, and it is determined whether both of the terminals EA and EB are “1” (S904). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", the flow shifts to S964 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not “1”, the flow shifts to S906.

At S900, the encoder position is changed to code E
If it is determined that the value is not 1, the flow shifts to S906, where the lens barrel timer is set to 10 seconds. Then, the encoder stop position is set to E1 (S908), and the motor 227 of the lens barrel drive unit 222 is selected as a driving motor (hereinafter, “lens barrel driving motor is selected”) (S910).

Then, the flow shifts to S912, where the outputs of the parallel terminals DC0 to DC2 are set low, the motor 227 is set in a standby state, and the terminals EA and EB are set to the input ports (S914). Then, after waiting for 2 ms (S916),
A closing drive preparation process is performed (S918). The close drive preparation processing includes Z1 position DC drive switching point pulse data (EP Z1 BRAKE) and forward rotation limit time (ET PI)
This is the process of setting such information.

Then, the flow shifts to S920, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is low (hereinafter, referred to as "L"), DC1.
Is L, and the output of DC2 is high (hereinafter, referred to as “H”). Then, the flow shifts to S922, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the WIDE drive is performed. Then, a flag for ignoring the zoom switch is set (S924), and W
An IDE drive process is performed (S926). The WIDE drive process is a process of moving the lens barrel 1 in, and the details of the process will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S928, where it is determined whether or not the lens barrel is overtime. If it is determined that the lens barrel is overtime, the flow shifts to S950. Here, the lens barrel overtime means that the time (for example, 10 seconds) initially set in the lens barrel timer has elapsed. If this time has elapsed, the lens barrel has some operational failure and is used to determine an abnormality in the lens barrel operation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S928 that the lens barrel overtime has not occurred, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection overtime has occurred (S9).
30).

When it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, the flow shifts to S950. The encoder detection overtime is the same as the lens barrel overtime, and is used to determine an abnormality if the encoder signal does not change for a certain time at the encoder detection stage.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S930 that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, the process proceeds to S9
32, and it is determined whether or not both the terminals EA and EB are “1”. If it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not "1", the flow shifts to S918. Terminal EA,
When it is determined that both the EBs are “1”, a stop driving process is performed (S932).

The stop drive process is a process for applying a signal for rotating the motor 227 in the reverse direction to decelerate the rotation of the motor 227, and then supplying a signal for rotating the motor 227 in the forward direction again to perform the constant low speed drive. FIG. 37 shows a timing chart of driving stop during WIDE driving.

In S936 of FIG. 35, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel is overtime. If it is determined that the lens barrel is overtime, the process proceeds to S944.
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel is not overtime, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S938). Here, “PI overtime” means a case where the output of the drive detector 228 that detects the rotation drive of the motor 227 has not been kept for a certain period of time.

If it is determined in S938 that the PI overtime has occurred, the flow shifts to S944. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, an encoder reading process is performed (S94).
0), it is determined whether the terminals EA and EB are both "1" (S942). When it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not “1”, the process returns to S918. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are both “1”,
The process moves to S944.

In S950, an encoder reading process is performed. Then, the flow shifts to S952, where it is determined whether the terminals EA, EB are both "1" or not. When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not both "1", the flow shifts to S954 in FIG. On the other hand, terminals EA, E
When both B are determined to be “1”, S944
Move to

At S944, the encoder position is set to E1. Then, the lens barrel position is set to Z1 (S
946), the recovery prohibition is set (S948).
Then, the flow shifts to S954 in FIG. 36, where a reversal & brake process is performed. The reverse & brake process is a process in which the motor 227 is energized in the reverse rotation direction to stop the rotation rapidly (see FIG. 37).

Then, the flow shifts to S956, where it is determined whether the encoder position is at E1 or not. If it is determined that the encoder position is not at E1, a lens barrel error is set (S966), and recovery prohibition is set (S96).
8), proceed to S970. On the other hand, if the encoder position is E
When it is determined to be 1, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel is overtime, and when it is determined that the lens barrel is overtime, the process proceeds to S966. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel is not overtime, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S960).

When it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, the flow shifts to S966. on the other hand,
If it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, the flow shifts to S962, the lens barrel error is reset, and the flow shifts to S970.

In S964, the lens barrel position is set to Z1.
Is set, and the flow shifts to S970. In S970, the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L and the driver unit 219 is not operated, and the close processing ends.

Next, the zoom TELE processing will be described.

FIGS. 38 and 39 show flowcharts of the zoom TELE processing. The zoom TELE process is a process of extending the lens barrel 1 in accordance with the operation of the TELE switch 19.

As shown in S1000 of FIG. 38, a battery check process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the battery check is NG (S1002). When the battery check is NG, the process shifts to S1059 in FIG. On the other hand, when the battery check is not NG,
The flow shifts to S1004, where it is determined whether a lens barrel error has been set.

When the lens barrel error is set,
The lens barrel error processing is performed (S1010), and S1 in FIG.
It moves to 059. On the other hand, when the lens barrel error is not set, an encoder check process is performed (S1).
006), it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1008). If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, the flow shifts to S1010. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, it is determined whether or not the encoder position is at the TELE end (S1012).

In S1012, the encoder position is set to TEL
When it is determined that it is the E end, S1053 in FIG.
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder position is not at the TELE end, the encoder stop position is set to E7 (S1014), a power on / off temperature measurement process is performed (S1016), and the current lens barrel position is used as past lens barrel position data. Is set (S1018), and the zoom TELE is set.
Driving preparation processing is performed (S1020). Zoom TEL
The E drive preparation processing includes the brake point pulse data (EP BRAKE) used in stop drive and the like and the forward rotation limit time (ET
PI) and other data.

Then, the flow shifts to S1022, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, DC1
Is H, and the output of DC2 is H. And TE
The LE driving process is performed (S1024). The details of the contents of the TELE driving process will be described later.

Then, a stop driving process is performed (S102).
6), a reversal & brake process is performed (S1028).
The stop drive process is a process of performing a constant low-speed drive by giving a signal to the motor 227 to rotate in the reverse direction to reduce the rotation of the motor 227 and then again giving a signal to rotate in the forward direction. FIG. 40 shows a timing chart of driving stop during TELE driving. The reversing & braking process is a process of stopping the rotation by rotating the motor 227 in the reverse direction (see FIG. 40).

Then, the flow shifts to S1030, where terminals EA,
It is determined whether both EBs are “1”. Terminal E
When it is determined that both A and EB are “1”, S
The process moves to 1040. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not “1”, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection overtime has occurred (S10).
32) When it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, a lens barrel error is set (S10).
34), the flow shifts to S1040, where recovery prohibition is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection is not overtime, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S1036). When it is determined that the PI is overtime, S1 is determined.
It moves to 040. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the recovery prohibition is reset (S1038).

Then, the flow shifts to S1042, where it is determined whether a lens barrel error has been set or not. If it is determined that a lens barrel error has been set, the flow shifts to S1050. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error has not been set, it is determined whether or not the past lens barrel position is equal to or less than Z2 (S1044).

If it is determined that the past lens barrel position is not lower than Z2, the flow shifts to S1050. On the other hand, when it is determined that the past lens barrel position is equal to or less than Z2, it is determined whether the lens barrel position is equal to or more than Z3 (S1046). If it is determined that the lens barrel position is not equal to or higher than Z3, S10
Move to 50. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is equal to or higher than Z3, focus TELE standby movement processing is performed (S1048).

The focus TELE standby movement processing is performed in the TE
By operating the LE switch 19, the lens barrel position is changed to Z1, Z2.
When the lens group is moved from the lens to Z3 or more,
This is a process of moving the (focus) position to the TELE standby position. The details of this focus TELE standby movement processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1050, where it is determined whether a lens barrel error has been set or not. If it is determined that a lens barrel error has been set, the flow advances to S10 in FIG.
Go to 59. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error is not set, it is determined whether the lens barrel position is at the TELE end (S1052), and the lens barrel position is TELE.
If it is determined that it is not the end, the flow shifts to S1059 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is at the TELE end, the flow shifts to S1053 in FIG. 39, and a flash charging process is performed (S1053).

[0246] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1054, where it is determined whether the shutter button 11 has been half-pressed (SP1 has been turned on) or not. If it is determined that the shutter button 11 has been half-pressed, the flow shifts to S1064. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shutter button 11 has not been half-pressed, a clock process is performed (S1056), and it is determined whether the TELE switch 19 has been turned off (S105).
8). If it is determined that the TELE switch 19 has not been turned off, the process returns to S1054. On the other hand, when it is determined that the TELE switch 19 has been turned off, S10
Move to 64.

By the way, in S1059, it is determined whether or not the open code is set as the main switch state. When it is determined that the open code is set, the flow shifts to S1064. On the other hand, when it is determined that the open code has not been set, a clock process is performed (S1060), and it is determined whether the TELE switch 19 has been turned off (S1062). Here, when it is determined that the TELE switch 19 is not turned off,
It returns to S1060. On the other hand, when it is determined that the TELE switch 19 has been turned off, the flow shifts to S1064, where the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L and the driver unit 219 does not operate, and the zoom TELE processing ends.

Next, the zoom WIDE processing will be described.

FIGS. 41 and 42 show flowcharts of the zoom WIDE processing. The zoom WIDE process is a process of retracting the lens barrel 1 in accordance with the operation of the WIDE switch 20.

As shown in S1100 of FIG. 41, a battery check process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the battery check is NG (S1102). If the battery check is NG, the process shifts to S1180 in FIG. On the other hand, when the battery check is not NG,
The flow shifts to S1104, where it is determined whether a lens barrel error has been set.

When the lens barrel error is set,
The lens barrel error processing is performed (S1110), and S1 in FIG.
Go to 180. On the other hand, when the lens barrel error is not set, an encoder check process is performed (S1).
106), it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1108). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, the flow shifts to S1110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, it is determined whether or not the encoder position is at E1 (S1112).

In S1112, when it is determined that the encoder position is at E1, the flow shifts to S1188 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder position is not E1, the encoder stop position is set to E1 (S1).
1114), a power on / off temperature measurement process is performed (S111).
6) The current lens barrel position is set as data of the past lens barrel position (S1118), and 10 seconds is set as the lens barrel timer.
Is set (S1120), and zoom WIDE drive preparation processing is performed (S1122).

The zoom WIDE drive preparation processing includes the forward rotation limit time (ETPI) and the reverse rotation brake time data (ET REVE).
RS) data, the DC drive switching point pulse data (EP DC) is set in the event counter, and the brake point pulse data (EP DC) is set in the event counter 2.
BRAKE).

Then, the flow shifts to S1126, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, DC1
Is L and the output of DC2 is H. And WI
A DE driving process is performed (S1128). The details of the WIDE drive processing will be described later.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel is overtime (S1130). If it is determined that the lens barrel is overtime, the inversion and braking process is performed (S1152), and the lens barrel error is detected. Is set (S1154), and recovery prohibition is set (S115).
6), the flow shifts to S1164 in FIG. The reverse & brake process is a process of rotating the motor 227 in the reverse direction to stop the rotation (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1130 that the lens barrel overtime has not occurred, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection overtime has occurred (S1130).
132) If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, then the flow shifts to S1152. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether both of the terminals EA and EB are “1” (S1134). If it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not "1", the flow shifts to S1150, and zoom shift processing is performed.

FIG. 43 shows a flowchart of the zoom shift processing.

As shown in the figure, the encoder detection overtime is reset (S1200), and 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1).
202). Then, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S1204). If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the encoder detection overtime is set (S1).
222), a lens barrel error is set (S1224), a recovery prohibition is set (S1226), and the flow shifts to S1228.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1204 that the encoder detection overtime has not occurred, encoder reading processing is performed (S1206), and the terminal E
It is determined whether or not A is zero (S1207). If it is determined that the terminal EA is not zero, S1204
Return to On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is zero, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the standby state is set (S120)
8), zoom tele drive preparation processing is performed (S12)
10).

When the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L,
The output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H (S121).
2) 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1214), and it is determined whether the encoder detection overtime is reached (S1216).
If it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, the flow shifts to S1222. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, an encoder reading process is performed (S1218),
It is determined whether the terminal EA is 1 (S122).
0). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not 1, S1
Return to 216. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is 1, the flow shifts to S1228, where a stop control process is performed and a reversal & brake process is performed (S1230).

Then, the flow shifts to S1232, where it is determined whether the PI is overtime. If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the recovery prohibition is set (S1234), and the zoom shift processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the zoom shift processing is ended.

When it is determined in S1134 in FIG. 41 that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", the event counter stores the Z1 position pulse data (EPZ
1) is set (S1136), and the event counter 2
To Z1 stop brake point data -1 (EP Z1 BRA
KE-1) is set (S1138).

Then, the flow shifts to S1140, where a stop drive process is performed, and it is determined whether or not the lens barrel is overtime (S1142). If it is determined that the lens barrel is overtime, the flow shifts to S1152.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel is not overtime, an encoder reading process is performed (S114).
4) It is determined whether both the terminals EA and EB are "1" (S1146). When it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not “1”, the process returns to S1122. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", the inversion and braking process is performed (S1148).

Then, the flow shifts to S1156, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime. If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1162. And S1158
Then, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime. If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S1162. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, recovery prohibition is set (S1160).

Then, the flow shifts to S1164 in FIG. 42, where it is determined whether or not a lens barrel error has been set. If it is determined that a lens barrel error has been set, the process proceeds to S11.
Move to 78. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error has not been set, it is determined whether or not the past lens barrel position is equal to or greater than Z3 (S1166).

If it is determined that the past lens barrel position is not equal to or larger than Z3, the flow shifts to S1178. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is equal to or more than Z3, the lens barrel position is determined to be Z2.
It is determined whether it is the following (S1168). When it is determined that the lens barrel position is not equal to or less than Z2, S1178.
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is equal to or less than Z2, focus WIDE standby movement processing is performed (S1170).

In the focus WIDE standby movement processing, the WI
When the lens barrel position is moved from the position equal to or higher than Z3 to Z1 and Z2 by operating the DE switch 20, the second lens group 1
This is a process of moving the 02 (focus) position to the WIDE standby position. The details of the focus WIDE standby movement process will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S1172, where it is determined whether the lens barrel position is at Z1 or not. If it is determined that the lens barrel position is not at Z1, the flow shifts to S1178. When it is determined that the lens barrel position is Z1, it is determined whether or not the LPIIN overtime is set, and the LPI
If it is determined that the IN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S1176, where focus error recovery processing is performed. Focus error recovery processing
When the gears do not mesh well, for example, when the second lens group 102 is moved to the WIDE standby position, this state is restored. Details of the processing content will be described later.

If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, the flow shifts to S1178. In S1178, it is determined whether or not a lens barrel error has been set. If it is determined that a lens barrel error has been set, the flow shifts to S1180. S1180
Then, it is determined whether or not the close code is set as the main switch state. If it is determined that the close code is set, the flow shifts to S1196. on the other hand,
If it is determined that the closing code has not been set,
Clock processing is performed (S1182), and WIDE switch 2
It is determined whether 0 has been turned off (S1184). Here, when it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 has not been turned off, the process returns to S1182. On the other hand, when it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 has been turned off, S11
Move to 96.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1178 that the lens barrel error has not been set, the lens barrel position is set to WI
It is determined whether or not the lens is at the DE end (S1186). If it is determined that the lens barrel position is not at the WIDE end, the process proceeds to S118.
Move to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is at the WIDE end, the flow shifts to S1188, where a flash charging process is performed.

[0271] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1190, where it is determined whether the shutter button 11 has been half-pressed (SP1 has been turned on) or not. If it is determined that the shutter button 11 has been half-pressed, the flow shifts to S1196. On the other hand, when it is determined that the shutter button 11 has not been half-pressed, a clock process is performed (S1192), and it is determined whether the WIDE switch 20 has been turned off (S119).
4). When it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 is not turned off, the process returns to S1190. On the other hand, when it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 has been turned off, S11
Move to 96.

In S1196, the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L and the driver unit 219 is not operated, and the zoom WIDE processing ends.

Next, the tele drive processing will be described.

FIGS. 44 and 45 show flowcharts of the TELE drive processing. The TELE driving process is a process of extending the lens barrel 1.

As shown in S1300 of FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the encoder stop position -1 is equal to or less than the current encoder position (Em). When it is determined that the encoder stop position -1 is equal to or less than the current encoder position (Em), the flow shifts to S1338 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder stop position -1 is not smaller than or equal to the current encoder position (Em), 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S130).
2).

Then, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S1304). If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1382 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not elapsed, the flow shifts to S1306, where it is determined whether the TELE switch 19 is ON or not. The process moves to S1338. On the other hand, if it is determined that the TELE switch 19 is ON, the flow shifts to S1308, where an encoder reading process is performed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1310). If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the flow returns to S1304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, a 10 ms timer is started (S1).
312), an encoder reading process is performed (S131)
4), it is determined whether the terminal EB is 1 or not (S13)
16).

When it is determined that the terminal EB is not 1, the flow returns to S1304. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, it is determined whether or not the overtime is 10 ms (S1318). When it is determined that the overtime is not over, the process returns to S1314. On the other hand, when it is determined that the overtime has occurred, it is determined whether the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1320), and when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the process returns to S1304. . on the other hand,
When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, the drive in the TELE direction is set (S1322), and 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1324).

Then, the flow shifts to S1326, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime. If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1382 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether the TELE switch 19 is ON (S1328), and when it is determined that the TELE switch 19 is not ON, the process proceeds to S1356 in FIG. Transition.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the TELE switch 19 is ON, an encoder reading process is performed (S1330), and it is determined whether or not the terminal EB is 1 (S1332). When it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, the process returns to S1326. On the other hand, terminal EB
Is determined to be not 1, the encoder position (E
m) is added with 1 (S1334), and the lens barrel position (Z
n) is set to the encoder position (Em) (S)
1336). Then, the process returns to S1300.

At S1338 in FIG. 45, 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime. Then, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S1340), and when it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1382. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, the flow shifts to S1342, and
An encoder reading process is performed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1344). If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the flow returns to S1340. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, a 10 ms timer is started (S1).
346), and an encoder reading process is performed (S134).
8), it is determined whether the terminal EB is 1 or not (S13)
50).

When it is determined that the terminal EB is not 1, the flow returns to S1340. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, it is determined whether or not the overtime is 10 ms (S1352). When it is determined that the overtime is not over, the process returns to S1348. On the other hand, when it is determined that the overtime has occurred, it is determined whether the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1354), and when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the process returns to S1340. . on the other hand,
When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, the drive in the TELE direction is set (S1356), and 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1358).

[0284] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1360, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime, and when it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1382. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, an encoder reading process is performed (S1362),
It is determined whether the terminal EB is 1 (S136).
4). Then, when it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, the process returns to S1360. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is not 1, 1 is added as the encoder position (S1366).

Then, the flow shifts to S1368, where it is determined whether the encoder position is at or above E7 (TELE end). If it is determined that the encoder position is not at or above E7, E7 is set as the encoder position (S1).
370). On the other hand, if it is determined that the encoder position is equal to or greater than E7, the flow shifts to S1372, where the lens barrel position (Z
The encoder position (Em) is set as n), and 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1374).

[0286] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1376, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime, and when it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1382. In S1382, the encoder detection overtime is set. And
The TELE driving process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1376 that the encoder detection overtime has not occurred, encoder reading processing is performed (S1378), and the terminal E
It is determined whether or not A is 1 (S1380). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not 1, the process returns to S1376. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is 1,
The TELE driving process ends.

Next, the WIDE drive processing will be described.

FIGS. 46 and 47 show flowcharts of the WIDE drive processing. The WIDE driving process is a process of moving the lens barrel 1 in.

As shown in S1400 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether or not the encoder stop position +1 is equal to or greater than the current encoder position (Em). If it is determined that the encoder stop position +1 is equal to or greater than the current encoder position (Em), the flow shifts to S1506 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder stop position +1 is not greater than or equal to the current encoder position (Em), 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S140).
2).

Then, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S1404). If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1506 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, the flow shifts to S1406, where it is determined whether the WIDE switch 20 is on or not. If it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 is not on, the process of FIG. The process moves to S1452. On the other hand, when it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 is on, the flow shifts to S1408, where an encoder reading process is performed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1410). If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the flow returns to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, a 10 ms timer is started (S1).
412), an encoder reading process is performed (S141).
4), it is determined whether the terminal EB is 1 or not (S14)
16).

When it is determined that the terminal EB is not 1, the flow returns to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, it is determined whether or not the overtime is 10 ms (S1418). When it is determined that the overtime is not over, the process returns to S1414. On the other hand, when it is determined that the overtime has occurred, it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1420). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the process returns to S1404. . on the other hand,
When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, the WIDE direction drive is set (S1422), and 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1424).

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1426, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime. If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1506 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether the WIDE switch 20 is on (S1428), and when it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 is not on, the process proceeds to S1470 in FIG. Transition.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the WIDE switch 20 is on, an encoder reading process is performed (S1430), and it is determined whether the encoder position is equal to or higher than E3 (S1432). Encoder position is E
If it is determined that it is three or more, the flow shifts to S1440. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder position is not equal to or higher than E3, it is determined whether both of the terminals EA and EB are "1" (S1434). If it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are “1”, the flow shifts to S1436, where an encoder reading process is performed, and the terminals EA and EB are again input.
It is determined whether both EBs are “1” (S143)
8).

If it is determined in S1438 that both terminals EA and EB are not "1", the flow shifts to S1440. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1438 that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", the process proceeds to step S151 in FIG.
Move to 0.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1434 that both of the terminals EA and EB are not "1", the terminal EB is set to 1
Is determined (S1440). When it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, the process returns to S1426. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is not 1, 1 is subtracted as the encoder position (Em) (S1).
442), the encoder position (E) as the lens barrel position (Zn).
m) is set (S1450). And and,
It returns to S1400.

In S1452 in FIG. 47, 2 seconds are set as the encoder detection overtime. Then, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S1454). If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the process shifts to S1506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, the flow shifts to S1456, and
An encoder reading process is performed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the terminals EA, EB are intermediate codes (S1458). If it is determined that the terminals EA, EB are not intermediate codes, the flow returns to S1454. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, a 10 ms timer is started (S1).
460), and an encoder reading process is performed (S146)
2) It is determined whether the terminal EB is 1 or not (S14)
64).

If it is determined in S1464 that the terminal EB is not 1, the flow returns to S1454. On the other hand, terminal EB
Is determined to be 1, it is determined whether or not the time is 10 ms overtime (S1466). If it is determined that the time is not overtime, S is determined.
Return to 1462. On the other hand, when it is determined that the overtime has occurred, it is determined whether or not the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes (S1468). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the process returns to S1454. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, the WIDE direction drive is set (S1).
470), 2 seconds as encoder detection overtime
c is set (S1472).

Then, the flow shifts to S1474, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime, and when it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1506. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, an encoder reading process is performed (S1476),
It is determined whether the encoder position is equal to or larger than E3 (S1478). If it is determined that the encoder position is equal to or larger than E3, the flow shifts to S1486. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder position is not equal to or higher than E3, it is determined whether both of the terminals EA and EB are "1" (S1480). If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", the flow shifts to S1482, where an encoder reading process is performed, and it is determined again whether both of the terminals EA and EB are "1" (S1484). ).

[0302] If it is determined in S1484 that the terminals EA and EB are not both "1", the flow shifts to S1486. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1484 that the terminals EA and EB are both "1", the flow shifts to S1508.

At S1508, E is set as the encoder position.
1 is set, and Z1 is set as the lens barrel position (S1510). Then, the WIDE drive processing ends.

At S1486, it is determined whether the terminal EB is at 1 or not. When it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, the process returns to S1474. On the other hand, when the terminal EB is 1
When it is determined that the encoder position is not
Is subtracted (S1488).

Then, the flow shifts to S1490, where it is determined whether the encoder position is smaller than E0. If it is determined that the encoder position is smaller than E0, E1 is set as the encoder position (S1492), and a lens barrel error occurs. It is set (S1494).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1490 that the encoder position is not smaller than E0, the process proceeds to S1496.
To the encoder position (E) as the lens barrel position (Zn).
m) is set, and 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1498).

[0307] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1500, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime. If it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S1506. In S1506, an encoder detection overtime is set. And
The WIDE drive processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1500 that the encoder detection overtime has not occurred, encoder reading processing is performed (S1502), and the terminal E
It is determined whether or not A is 1 (S1504). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not 1, the process returns to S1500. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is 1,
The WIDE drive processing ends.

Next, the lens barrel recovery processing will be described.

FIG. 48 shows a flowchart of the lens barrel recovery processing, and FIG. 49 shows an outline of the operation of the lens barrel recovery processing. The lens barrel recovery processing is processing for driving the lens barrel to return when the camera 2 is in a standby state and the lens barrel is pulled out or pushed in due to an external factor.

As shown in S1600 of FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel recovery is set. If it is determined that the lens barrel recovery has not been set, it is determined that the lens barrel has not been pulled out or pushed in due to an external factor, and the flow shifts to S1648. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lens barrel recovery has been set, it is determined that the lens barrel has been pulled out or pushed in by an external factor, and the flow shifts to S1602, where drive preparation processing is performed and the motor to be driven is driven. Is selected as the lens barrel driving motor 227.

Then, the flow shifts to S1604, where the outputs of the parallel terminals DC0 to DC2 are set to L, the motor 227 is set in a standby state, and the terminals EA and EB are set to the input ports (S1606). After waiting for 2 ms (S1608), brake point data at the time of Z1 stop (EP Z1 BRAK
E) is set (S1610), forward rotation limit time data (ET PI) is set (S1612), and reverse rotation brake time data (ET REVERS) is set (S161).
4).

Then, the encoder detection overtime is reset (S1616), the PI overtime is reset (S1618), the DC drive flag is set (S1620), and the WID is set as an event counter.
Recovery pulse data in WIDE direction during E drive (EP RCVR
YW) is set (S1622).

Then, the flow shifts to S1624, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H and the output of DC1 is changed to H. The outputs of L and DC2 are set to H, and WIDE drive is performed (S1626), and it is determined whether or not the encoder detection overtime has occurred (S1).
628). When it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the inversion and braking process is performed (S1630), and a lens barrel error is set (S163).
2), recovery prohibition is set (S1634).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1628 that the encoder detection overtime has not occurred, encoder reading processing is performed (S1636), and the terminal E
It is determined whether B is 1 (S163).
8). If it is determined that the terminal EB is not at 1, the process returns to S1628. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, the lens barrel recovery drive processing is performed (S1640). Details of the lens barrel recovery drive processing will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S1642, where it is determined whether a lens barrel error has been set or not. If it is determined that a lens barrel error has been set, the flow shifts to S1632. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error has not been set, the lens barrel recovery is reset (S16).
44), the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, and the driver unit 219 is brought into a state of not operating (S164).
6), proceed to S1648.

In S1648, it is determined whether or not an intermediate code error has been set. If it is determined that no intermediate code error has been set, the lens barrel recovery processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the intermediate code error is set, the SM closing process is performed (S
1650, see FIG. 28), the intermediate code error is reset (S1652), and lens barrel error input processing is performed (S1654). Then, the lens barrel recovery processing ends.

As described above, according to the lens barrel recovery processing, when the camera 2 is in the standby state and the lens barrel is pulled out or pushed in due to an external factor, the lens barrel position is returned to the original position or the lens barrel is moved. The renormalization barrier 83 can be closed. For this reason, when the lens barrel is pulled out or pushed in by an external factor, it is possible to avoid that the camera 2 is in a failure state assuming that the lens barrel position is in error. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the camera 2 from easily failing.

Next, the lens barrel recovery drive processing will be described.

FIGS. 50 and 51 show flowcharts of the lens barrel recovery drive processing. The lens barrel recovery drive processing is processing performed during the lens barrel recovery processing (S164 in FIG. 48).
0).

[0321] As shown in S1700 of Fig. 50, a motor PI count process is performed. Details of the motor PI counting process will be described later (see FIG. 52). And S
The flow shifts to 1702, where it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime. If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S1774 in FIG. 51. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, and the output of DC2 is set to H (S17).
04), brake point data (EP BRAKE) is set (S1706), and forward rotation limit time data (ETP
I) is set (S1708), and reverse rotation brake time data (ET REVERS) is set (S1710).

Then, the encoder detection overtime is reset (S1712), the PI overtime is reset (S1714), the DC drive flag is set (S1716), and the WID is set as an event counter.
E-drive TELE direction recovery pulse data (EP RCVR
(YT) is set (S1718).

Then, the flow shifts to S1720, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H and the standby state is established, and then the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L and the output of DC1 becomes L. The outputs of H and DC2 are set to H, the TELE drive is performed (S1722), and the motor PI count process is performed (S1724).

Then, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S1726). If it is determined that the PI overtime has occurred, the process proceeds to S17 in FIG.
The process moves to 74. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the brake point data (EP BRAKE) is set (S1728), and the normal rotation width limit time data (ET PI) is set (S1730).
Reverse rotation brake time data (ET REVERS) is set (S1732).

Then, the encoder detection overtime is reset (S1734), the PI overtime is reset (S1736), the flag of DC drive is set (S1738), and the DC drive switching point pulse data (EP DC ) Is set (S1740), and brake point pulse data-1 (EP BRAKE-1) is set as the event counter 2 (S1742).

Then, the flow shifts to S1744, where it is determined whether the encoder detection overtime has elapsed.
When it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, a lens barrel error is set (S1760),
The encoder detection overtime is set (S176).
2), recovery inhibition is set (S1764). Then, the flow shifts to S1766.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1744 that the encoder detection overtime has not occurred, encoder reading processing is performed (S1746), and the terminal E
It is determined whether B is zero (S174).
8). When it is determined that the terminal EB is not zero, the process returns to S1744. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is zero, 2 sec is set as the encoder detection overtime (S1750).

[0328] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1752, where it is determined whether the encoder detection overtime has elapsed or not.
If it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, the flow shifts to S1760. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, an encoder reading process is performed (S1754),
It is determined whether the terminal EA is set to 1 (S17).
56). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not at 1, the process returns to S1752. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is 1, the TELE direction drive is set (S1758).

Then, the flow shifts to S1766, where a stop control process is performed and a reversal & brake process is performed (S176).
8). Then, the flow shifts to S1770, where it is determined whether the PI is overtime. If it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the flow shifts to S1778. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI is overtime, the recovery inhibition is set (S17).
72), proceeding to S1778. In S1774, recovery prohibition is set, and a lens barrel error is set (S1774).
1776).

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1778, where terminals EA,
EB is set to the output port, and the lens barrel recovery drive processing ends.

Next, the motor PI counting process will be described.

FIG. 52 shows a flowchart of the motor PI counting process. The motor PI counting process is a process performed during the lens barrel recovery driving process (see FIGS. 50 and 51), and a process of counting the rotation amount of the lens barrel driving motor 227 based on the output of the drive detector 228. It is.

As shown at S1800 in FIG. 52, 1 second is set as the PI overtime. And
It is determined whether the input of the terminal ZPIIN receiving the output of the drive detector 228 is H (high) (S1802),
When it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is not at H, S1
The process moves to 816. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is at H, the PI overtime is set to 1 second.
c is set (S1804), and it is determined whether or not the event count has ended (S1806).

If it is determined in S1806 that the event count has ended, the motor PI counting process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the event count has not ended, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S1808).

In S1808, when it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S1818. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether the terminal ZPIIN is at L (low) (S1810). If it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is not at L, the process returns to S1806. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is at L, it is determined whether or not the event count has ended (S1).
812).

If it is determined in S1812 that the event count has ended, the motor PI counting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the event count has not ended, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S1814).

In S1814, when it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S1818. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether the terminal ZPIIN is at H or not (S1816). When it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is not at H, the process returns to S1812. On the other hand, terminal ZP
If it is determined that IIN is at H, the process returns to S1804.

In S1818, PI overtime is set. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L,
The output of DC1 is set to L and the output of DC2 is set to H, and a standby state is set (S1820). After waiting for 8 μs (S1822),
The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is H, D
The output of C2 is set to H and a brake output state is set (S18).
24) After 100 ms standby (S1826), the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the camera 2 is in a standby state (S182).
8) The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to L, the camera 2 is set in a standby state (S1830), and the motor PI counting process ends.

Next, the lens drive processing and the lens return processing will be described.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the lens drive process, and FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the lens return process. The lens drive process is a process of extending the entire lens barrel 1 or extending the second lens group 102 (focus) by operating the shutter button 11. The lens return process is a process of returning the lens barrel 1 or the second lens group 102 extended by the lens drive process to the standby position.

As shown in S1900 of FIG. 53, in the lens drive processing, first, the lens drive NG is reset. Then, an encoder check process is performed (S1902), and it is determined whether the terminals EA and EB are zero (S1904). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are zero, a lens barrel error is set (S
1914), the lens drive NG is set (S19)
16), recovery prohibition is set (S1918), and S
Move to 1920.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1904 that both the terminals EA and EB are not zero, the terminals EA and EB
Is an intermediate code (S1906), and
If it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are intermediate codes, the flow shifts to S1914. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not intermediate codes, the lens barrel position is Z1.
Is determined (S1908), and the lens barrel position is Z
When it is determined to be 1, the first lens drive process (LD1 process) is performed (S1910).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is not at Z1, the second lens drive processing (LD2 processing) is performed (S1912). The first lens drive process is a process of extending the entire lens barrel 1. The second lens drive process is a process of extending the second lens group 102. The details of the first lens drive process and the second lens drive process will be described later.

[0347] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1920, where the driver O
The N / OFF terminal CE is set to L and the driver unit 219
Does not operate, and the lens drive process ends.

As shown in S1950 of FIG. 54, in the lens return process, first, it is determined whether or not a lens barrel error is set. When it is determined that the lens barrel error is set, the flow shifts to S1962.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel error has not been set, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is at Z1 (S1).
1952). When it is determined that the lens barrel position is not Z1, the second lens return processing (LR2 processing) is performed (S1958).

The second lens return process is a process of moving the second lens group 102 extended by the second lens drive process to a standby position. The details of the second lens return processing will be described later. On the other hand, in S1952,
When it is determined that the lens barrel position is Z1, it is determined whether or not the lens drive is NG (S1954). When it is determined that the lens drive is NG, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime. (S19
60).

If it is determined in S1960 that the PI overtime has not elapsed, the flow shifts to S1962. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S1956.

When it is determined in S1954 that the lens drive is not NG, the first lens return processing (LR1 processing) is performed (S1956). The first lens return process is a process of moving the entire lens barrel 1 extended by the first lens drive process to a standby position. Details of the first lens return process will be described later.

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S1962, where the driver O
The N / OFF terminal CE is set to L and the driver unit 219
Does not operate, and the lens return process ends.

Next, the first lens drive processing and the first lens return processing will be described.

FIG. 55 shows an outline of the operation of the first lens drive processing and the first lens return processing. Thick arrows in FIG. 55 indicate the movement of the lens barrel 1. The first lens drive processing is performed by the TELE of the motor 227 for driving the lens barrel.
This is a process of extending the entire lens barrel 1 by driving. The first lens return process is a process of returning the entire lens barrel 1 drawn out by the first lens drive process by the WIDE drive of the lens barrel driving motor 227 to the standby position.

FIGS. 56 to 59 show flowcharts of the first lens drive processing (LD1 processing).

As shown in S2000 in FIG. 56, the lens barrel drive unit 2 is used as a motor to be driven after LD drive preparation processing is performed.
Twenty-two motors 227 are selected. And S2002
And the terminals EA and EB are set to the input ports,
After waiting for 2 ms (S2004), brake point pulse data at the time of Z1 stop (EP Z1 BRAKE) is set (S2004).
2006), forward rotation limit time data (ET PI) is set (S2008), and reverse rotation brake time data (ET RE
VERS) is set (S2010).

Then, the encoder detection overtime flag is reset (S2012), the PI overtime is reset (S2014), the DC driving flag is set (S2016), and the Z1 stop brake is obtained from the drive pulse data as an event count. Pulse data (DRV PLS- (E
P Z1 BRAKE-1)) is set (S2018). Here, the drive pulse data (DRV PLS) is pulse data obtained by a feeding operation.

Then, the flow shifts to S2020, where it is determined whether the result of operation of the event counter is a negative number. If it is determined that the operation result is a negative number, zero is set in the event counter, and the flow shifts to S2024. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation result of the event counter is not a negative number, the flow shifts to S2024.

In S2024, as event count 2, brake point pulse data at the time of Z1 stop-1 (EP
Z1 BRAKE-1) is set and the lens barrel timer is set to 10 seconds
c is set (S2026). Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel timer is overtime (S2).
028) When it is determined that the lens barrel timer is overtime, a lens barrel error is set (S20).
30), the encoder detection overtime is set (S2032), and the recovery prohibition is set (S20).
34). Then, the flow shifts to S2150 in FIG. 59.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2028 that the lens barrel timer is not overtime, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is H,
Is set to H, and the TELE drive is performed (S203).
6), 1 second is set as the encoder detection overtime (S2038).

[0358] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2040, where it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime, and when it is determined that the encoder detection is overtime, the flow shifts to S2032. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether the terminal EA is at L or not (S204).
2). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not at L, S2
Return to 040.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is at L, after waiting for 100 μs (S2044), the terminal EA is turned off.
Is determined to be L (S2046). Then, when it is determined that the terminal EA is not at L, S20
Return to 40. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is at L, the flow shifts to S2048 in FIG.

At S2048, 500 ms is set as the PI overtime, and it is determined whether terminal ZPIIN is at H or not (S2050). If it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is not at H, then the flow shifts to S2080. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is at H, 500 ms is set as the PI overtime (S2052), and it is determined whether or not the event count has ended (S2064).

When it is determined that the event count has not ended, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S2066). When it is determined that the PI is overtime, the process proceeds to S2100 in FIG. Then, the PI overtime is set, the recovery prohibition is set (S2102), and the flow shifts to S2156 in FIG.

In S2066 of FIG. 57, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not occurred, it is determined whether or not the terminal EA is L (S2068). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not L, Wait for 100 μs (S2
070), it is determined whether the terminal EA is at L or not (S2072). When it is determined that the terminal EA is at L, the flow shifts to S2074. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is not at L, the process returns to S2028 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2068 that the terminal EA is at L, it is determined whether or not the terminal ZPIIN is at L (S2074). Terminal ZPIIN is L
When it is determined that it is not, the process returns to S2064.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is at L, it is determined whether or not the event count has been completed (S2076). If it is determined that the event count has ended, the flow shifts to S2054. On the other hand, when it is determined that the event count has not ended, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S2078). If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S2100 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether or not the terminal EA is at L (S2080). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not L, after waiting for 100 μs (S2082), it is determined whether or not the terminal EA is L (S2084). When it is determined that the terminal EA is L, the process proceeds to S2086. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is not at L, the process returns to S2028 in FIG.

If it is determined in S2080 that terminal EA is at L, it is determined whether terminal ZPIIN is at H or not (S2086). Terminal ZPIIN is H
If not, the process returns to S2076. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is at H,
It returns to S2052.

When it is determined in S2064 that the event count has been completed, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the camera 2 is in a standby state. (S2054),
The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L, D
The output of C2 is set to H, and the WIDE drive is performed (S20).
56).

Then, the event count 2 data is set as the event count (S2058), and PI
500 ms is set as the overtime (S20
60), normal rotation width limit time data (ETPI) is set (S2062).

Then, the flow shifts to S2088 in FIG. 58, where it is determined whether the terminal ZPIIN is at H or not. Terminal ZP
If it is determined that IIN is not H, the flow shifts to S2122. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is at H, 500 ms is set as the PI overtime (S2090), and it is determined whether or not the event count has ended (S2092).

If it is determined in S2092 that the event count has not been completed, it is determined whether or not the terminal EA is at L (S2104). If it is determined that the terminal EA is not at L, the process waits for 100 μs ( S2106)
Thereafter, it is determined whether the terminal EA is at L or not (S210).
8) If it is determined that the terminal EA is at L,
Move to 110. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is not at L, the process returns to S2028 in FIG. On the other hand, S2
If it is determined at 104 that the terminal EA is at L, then the flow shifts to S2110.

In S2110, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime. If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S2100.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether the normal rotation width limit time (ET PI) has been overtime (S2112).

If it is determined that the normal rotation width limit time (ET PI) is not overtime, the flow shifts to S2120. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal rotation width limit time (ETPI) is overtime, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in the standby state. (S211
4) The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, the output of DC2 is H, and the TELE drive is performed (S
2116), the DC drive is reset (S211).
8). Then, control goes to a step S2120.

In S2120, it is determined whether the terminal ZPIIN is at L or not. When it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is not at L, the process returns to S2092. On the other hand, terminal ZP
When it is determined that IIN is L, it is determined whether or not the event count has ended (S212).
2).

If it is determined in S2122 that the event count has been completed, the flow shifts to S2094. On the other hand, when it is determined that the event count has not ended, it is determined whether or not the terminal EA is at L (S2124). When it is determined that the terminal EA is not at L, after waiting for 100 μs (S2126), It is determined whether the terminal EA is at L or not (S2128). If it is determined that the terminal EA is at L, the flow shifts to S2130. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EA is not L,
The process returns to S2028 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2124 that the terminal EA is at L, the flow shifts to S2130.

In S2130, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime. If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S2100.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether the normal rotation width limit time (ET PI) has been overtime (S2132).

If it is determined that the normal rotation width limit time (ET PI) is not overtime, the flow shifts to S2140. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal rotation width limit time (ETPI) is overtime, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 227 is in a standby state. (S213
4) The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, the output of DC2 is H, and the TELE drive is performed (S
2136), the DC drive is reset (S213)
8). Then, control goes to a step S2140.

At S2140, it is determined whether terminal ZPIIN is at H or not. When it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is not at H, the flow returns to S2092. On the other hand, terminal ZP
When it is determined that IIN is at H, it is determined whether DC driving is set or not (S2142).
When it is determined that DC driving is set,
It returns to S2090. On the other hand, when it is determined that the DC drive is not set, it is determined whether the brake logic is being output (S2144).

Here, "during brake logic output" means that the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is H, the output of DC2 is H, and the brake output state is established. If it is determined in S2144 that the brake logic is being output, the process proceeds to S20.
Return to 90. On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake logic is not being output, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 227
Is in a standby state (S2146), and the parallel terminal DC0
Is H, the output of DC1 is H, the output of DC2 is H, and a brake output state is set (S2148). And
It returns to S2090.

If it is determined in S2092 that the event count has been completed, the process proceeds to S2094.
Then, 100 ms is set as the PI overtime, and it is determined whether or not the PI overtime is reached (S2096). If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the flow shifts to S2156 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not occurred, it is determined whether the terminal ZPIIN is at L or not (S2098). When it is determined that the terminal ZPIIN is not at L, the process returns to S2096. On the other hand, terminal ZP
When it is determined that IIN is L, S2 in FIG.
Move to 150.

In S2150 in FIG. 59, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 227 is in a standby state. Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the WIDE drive is performed (S
2152), and stands by for a reverse rotation braking time (ET REVERS) (S2154).

[0380] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2156, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 227 is in a standby state. And
The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is H, D
The output of C2 is set to H and a brake output state is set (S21).
58), after waiting for 20 ms (S2160), the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H (S2162), the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, The output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 227 enters a standby state (S2164).

Then, the terminals EA and EB are set to the output ports (S2166), and it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S2168). If it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, the flow shifts to S2170, where the lens drive NG is set, and the first lens drive process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection is not overtime, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S2172), and when it is determined that the PI is overtime, S2 is determined.
Move to 170. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the first lens drive process ends.

FIG. 60 shows the first lens return processing (LR1).
2 shows a flowchart of (Processing).

As shown in S2200 in FIG. 60, the lens barrel driving section 2 is used as a motor for performing LD drive preparation processing and driving.
Twenty-two motors 227 (see FIG. 16) are selected. Then, the flow shifts to S2202, where the terminals EA and EB are set to the input ports. After waiting for 2 ms (S2204), the brake point pulse data at the time of Z1 stop (EP Z1 BRAKE) is set (S2206), and the forward rotation width limit time Data (E
TPI) is set (S2208), and reverse rotation braking time data (ET REVERS) is set (S2210).

Then, the encoder detection overtime flag is reset (S2212), the PI overtime is reset (S2214), the DC drive flag is set (S2216), and brake point pulse data (EP BRAKE) is used as an event count. Is set (S2218), and as the event count 2, the Z1 stop time brake point pulse data-1 (EP Z1 BRAKE
-1) is set (S2220).

Then, the flow shifts to S2222, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 227 is in a standby state. And
The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, D
The output of C2 is set to H, and the TELE drive is performed (S222).
4) It is determined whether or not the encoder detection overtime has occurred (S2226).

If it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, a lens barrel error is set (S2228), the encoder detection overtime is set (S2230), and the reversing & braking process is performed (S2232). . Then, control goes to a step S2256.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2226 that the encoder detection overtime has not occurred, an encoder reading process is performed (S2234), and the terminal E
It is determined whether B is 1 (H (high)) (S2).
236). When it is determined that the terminal EB is not 1,
The process moves to S2226. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal EB is 1, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection is overtime (S2238).

If it is determined in S2238 that the encoder detection overtime has occurred, the process proceeds to S2228.
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, an encoder reading process is performed (S2240), and it is determined whether the terminals EA and EB are 1 (S2242). Terminals EA, EB
Are not 1, the flow returns to S2238. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are 1, stop control processing is performed (S2244).

[0390] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2242, where a terminal EA,
It is determined whether or not EB is 1, and when it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are not 1, the process returns to S2206.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are 1, it is determined whether or not the PI is overtime (S2250). When it is determined that the PI overtime has occurred, a brake process is performed (S22).
52). On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the reverse & brake process is performed (S
2254). The reversing & braking process is a process of driving the lens barrel driving motor 227 in the reverse direction to reduce the rotation speed and then outputting the brake. The brake process is a process of outputting a brake without driving in reverse.

[0390] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2256, where recovery prohibition is set. The first lens return process ends.

Next, the second lens drive processing and the second lens return processing will be described.

FIG. 61 shows the second lens drive processing (LD2
3) shows an outline of operations of the second lens return process (LR2 process) and the second lens return process (LR2 process).

In the second lens drive process, when the lens barrel position is Z2, first, the second lens group 102 is driven (focused drive) in the reverse direction (left direction in FIG. 61), and the output of the detector 96 is output. Receiving terminal LHPIN (see FIG. 16)
After detecting the falling edge, focus driving is performed for a specified pitch count and stopped. Then, the focus drive is performed in the normal rotation direction, and after the rising of the terminal LHPIN is detected, the focus drive is performed by the drive pulse count determined by the payout calculation, and then the drive is stopped.

In the second lens drive process, when the lens barrel position is at Z3 to Z7, first, focus driving is performed in the reverse rotation direction, and after detecting the rising of the terminal LHPIN, focus driving is performed for a specified pitch count and stopped. Then, focus driving is performed in the normal rotation direction, and the terminal LHPIN is driven.
Is detected, the focus drive is performed by the drive pulse count determined by the payout calculation, and then the drive is stopped.

On the other hand, in the second lens return process, when the lens barrel position is Z2, first, focus drive is performed in the reverse direction by the drive pulse + α driven in the second lens drive process, and after the fall of the terminal LHPIN is detected. Then, the focus is driven by the specified pitch count and stopped. Then, focus drive is performed in the normal rotation direction, and the terminal LHPIN
After detecting the rising edge, focus driving is performed for a specified pitch count and stopped.

In the second lens return process, when the lens barrel position is Z3 to Z7, first, focus drive is performed in the reverse direction by the drive pulse + α driven in the second lens drive process to detect the rise of the terminal LHPIN. rear,
The focus is driven and stopped by the specified pitch count.
Then, focus drive is performed in the normal rotation direction, and the terminal LHP
After detecting the falling edge of IN, focus driving is performed for a specified pitch count and stopped.

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the operation during standby on the WIDE side in the second lens drive process, and FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the operation during standby on the TELE side in the second lens drive process. FIGS. 64 to 68 show flowcharts of the second lens drive process.

As shown in S2300 in FIG. 64, in the second lens drive process, first, a drive preparation process is performed, and the motor to be driven is the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 (hereinafter referred to as “focus motor” as appropriate). ) Is selected. Then, the flow shifts to S2302, where the output of parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is L, and motor 95 is in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S2304),
After waiting for 10 ms (S2306), the state is brought into a state where voltage output to the focus motor is possible (S2308).

Then, after waiting for 1 ms (S2310),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S2
312). The change of the operation mode to the high-speed mode is performed, for example, by changing the reference clock of the CPU 200.

Then, the lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM
ERROR1) is reset (S2314), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S2
316), the focus error is reset (S231)
8), HP (home position) detection is reset (S2320).

Then, the flow shifts to S2322, where it is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in the power on / off temperature measurement process (see S112 in FIG. 19) is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). If it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature, high-temperature focus drive energization time data (E_T_LD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S2324).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2322 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S2326). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S2330). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low temperature set temperature, the room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S2328).

In the high-temperature focus drive energization time data (E_T_LD2MONH), a time shorter than the room-temperature focus drive energization time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set. Also, focus drive energizing time data at room temperature (ET
LD2MONM) is the focus drive energizing time data (E
(T LD2MONL) is set.

[0405] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2332, where focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time. And the terminal LHP
The input of IN is read (S2334). Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is equal to or more than Z3 (S233).
6) When it is determined that the lens barrel position is not equal to or higher than Z3, it is determined that the lens barrel position is Z2, and the HP fall is set (S2338).

Then, it is determined whether terminal LHPIN is at H or not (S2340). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at H, then the flow shifts to S2524 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at H, the flow shifts to S2344.

By the way, in S2336, the lens barrel position is Z
If it is determined to be 3 or more, the HP rising is set (S2342). And terminal LHPIN
Is determined to be L (S2343). Terminal L
When it is determined that HPIN is not L,
It moves to 2524. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S2344.

[0408] In S2344, 0 is set as the focus count 0. And focus count 1
Is set to 0 (S2346), 0 is set to focus count 2 (S2348), and 0 is set to the focus count pulse (S235).
0), 0 is set as the focus count HP (S2352), and 0 is set as the focus count SUM (S2354).

Here, “focus count 0” means
It means the count (pitch) of the 0th speed control (see FIGS. 62 and 63). "Focus count 1" is the first
It means the count (pitch) of the speed control (see FIGS. 62 and 63). “Focus count 2” means the count (pitch) of the second speed control (see FIGS. 62 and 63). The “focus count pulse” means the count (pitch) of the pulse drive control (see FIGS. 62 and 63).

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, in the focus drive (drive of the second lens group 102), the second lens group 1
Speed control for changing the drive speed in accordance with the movement position of No. 02 is performed. As the speed control, the above-described 0th speed control, 1st speed control,
Speed control, second speed control, and pulse drive control are set. The pulse drive control is a lower speed control than the second speed control. The second speed control is a lower speed control than the first speed control. The 0th speed control and the 2nd speed control are controls of the same speed.

[0411] The "focus count HP" means the count (pitch) of the pulse drive control (see Figs. 62 and 63) after the HP is detected. "Focus count S
"UM" means the total pitch number of the drive. Here, the “pitch” means a half of one pulse, and one pulse is obtained at two pitches.

Then, the flow shifts to S2356 in FIG. 65, where 0 is set as focus count 0. And
The focus drive HP count data (EPHP) is set as the focus count HP (S2358).
As focus count SUM, focus drive HP count data (EP HP), focus standby position pitch count data (EP TAIKI), focus drive backlash count data (EP FCGB), and focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (D
P MARGIN) is set (S23)
60).

The focus count 1 is obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (EP LD2N1) and adding 20 ((EP LD2N1 * 2) +20) and subtracting the result from the focus count SUM. It is set (S2362).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S2364). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not 0 or less, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S2366).

[0415] Then, as the focus count pulse, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S236).
8). Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is at least Z3 (S2370).

If it is determined in S2370 that the lens barrel position is not at least Z3, the flow shifts to S2376. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is at least Z3,
The value obtained by adding the focus count 2 and the focus count pulse is set as the focus count 2 (S2372), and 0 is set as the focus count pulse (S2374).

Then, the flow shifts to S2376, where as focus count 1, focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N) doubled from focus count SUM.
After subtracting 1), the value obtained by dividing by 2 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a remainder (S2378). When it is determined that there is a remainder, a value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set as the focus count 2 (S2380), and the flow shifts to S2382. on the other hand,
If it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S2382, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S2410 in FIG. 66.

If it is determined in S2364 that the focus count 1 is equal to or smaller than 0, the focus count SUM is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S2384).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S2386). When it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S2388). Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is at least Z3 (S2390).

[0420] If it is determined in S2390 that the lens barrel position is not at least Z3, the flow shifts to S2396. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is at least Z3,
A value obtained by adding the focus count 2 and the focus count pulse is set as the focus count 2 (S2392), and 0 is set as the focus count pulse (S2394).

[0422] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2396, where 0 is set as the focus count 1. Then, the flow shifts to S2410 in FIG. 66.

By the way, when it is determined in S2386 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus count SUM is used as the focus count pulse.
From the focus drive brake pitch count data (E
P FCBRK) is set (S239)
8).

[0423] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2400, where it is determined whether the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, and when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S2402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is equal to or greater than Z3 (S2404).

If it is determined in S2404 that the lens barrel position is not at least Z3, the flow shifts to S2410 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is equal to or greater than Z3, a focus count pulse is set as focus count 2 (S2406), and 0 is set as the focus count pulse (S2408). Then, the flow shifts to S2410 in FIG. 66.

When it is determined in S2400 that the focus count pulse is 0 or less, it is determined that the focus count pulse is abnormal, and the flow shifts to S2524 in FIG.

In S2410 of FIG. 66, the terminal LPIIN (see FIG. 16) receiving the output of the detector 96 is read, and it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S2412). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is reset (S2416). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S2414).

[0427] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2418, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L,
2 is set to H, and the reverse rotation drive is performed (S232).
0).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S2422). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S2426). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S2424). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0429] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2428, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is set, the flow shifts to S2440. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime is not set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S2430). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S2432).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S2434). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S2438). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a braking pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S2436). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

Then, the flow shifts to S2440, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether the P detection flag has been reset (S2442). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, an LD error of the LD2 is set (S2444), and the flow shifts to S2524 in FIG. I do.

If it is determined in S2442 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S2446). When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the process proceeds to S252 in FIG.
Move to 4. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, the process proceeds to S24 of FIG.
Move to 48.

In S2448, a process of reading the terminal LHPIN is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is equal to or higher than Z3 (S2450). If it is determined that the lens barrel position is not equal to or higher than Z3, it is determined that the lens barrel position is Z2, and the HP rising is set ( S245
2).

Then, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S2454). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at L, then the flow shifts to S2524 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S2460.

By the way, in S2450, the lens barrel position is Z
If it is determined that the number is 3 or more, the HP falling is set (S2456). And terminal LHPIN
Is H (S2458). Terminal L
When it is determined that HPIN is not H, S in FIG.
It moves to 2524. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at H, the flow shifts to S2460.

At S2460, focus drive HP count data (EP HP) is set as focus count 0,
Focus drive backlash count data (EP FC
GB), the value obtained by adding the focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN) and the number of overpitches at the time of focus drive (CFCOV) are set. Then, 0 is set as the focus count HP (S2462), and a drive pulse (DRV PLS) is set as the focus count SUM (S246).
4).

Then, as the focus count 1, a value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and subtracting 20 pitches from the focus count SUM is set (S2466). Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S2468). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not 0 or less, the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N) is set as the focus count 2.
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling 1) is set (S2470).

The focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N) is used as the focus count pulse.
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S247).
2). Then, the value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S2473). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S2474). When it is determined that there is a surplus, the focus count 2 is set as
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S2476), and the flow shifts to S2478. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S2478, where a focus count of 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S2496 in FIG.

If it is determined in S2468 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S2480).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S2482). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S2484). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 and the flow shifts to S2496 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2482 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus drive pulse pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S2488).

[0442] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2490, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. If it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S2524 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S2).
492), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S2494). Then, the flow shifts to S2496 in FIG.

In S2496, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, and the output of DC2 is H
And the normal rotation drive is performed (S2498).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has been set (S2500). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has been set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing operation Is performed (S2502). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S2501). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0445] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2504, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S2516. On the other hand, LPII
If it is determined that the N overtime has not been set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S2506). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S2508).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S2510). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S2514). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a braking pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S2512). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2516, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether or not the P detection flag has been reset (S2518). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, an HP error of LD2 is set (S2522), and the flow shifts to S2524.

In S2524, a focus error is set. Then, a lens barrel error is set (S252).
6), the recovery prohibition is set (S2528), and the lens drive NG is set (S2530). Then, control goes to a step S2532.

If it is determined in S2518 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime is set (S2520). If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S2524. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is not set, the flow shifts to S2532.

In S2532, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And terminal LHPIN
Is set to the L output port (S2534), after waiting for 2 ms (S2536), the focus power supply is reset (S2538), the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, and the driver unit 219 is set in a non-operation state (S2534).
2540), the operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S2542), and a focus error EEPROM writing process is performed (S2544). The focus error EEPROM writing process is a process of writing a focus error into the EEPROM 218 after focus driving. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

After the focus error EEPROM writing processing, the second lens drive processing ends.

As described above, according to the second lens drive processing, as shown in FIG. 62, when the second lens group 102 (focus) is driven in reverse from the WIDE standby position,
After detecting the HP (home position) serving as the reference position, pulse drive control with a low speed is performed. For this reason,
It is possible to prevent the second lens group 102 from colliding with the stopper due to the momentum of the movement, and it is possible to avoid a serious failure such as a gear being bitten by the collision and being unable to be inverted.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, when moving the second lens group 102, the first speed control or the 0th speed control with a lower speed than DC driving is performed before passing through the HP. For this reason, HP can be accurately detected. Thereby, the movement of the second lens group 102 in focusing is performed precisely, and the focusing accuracy can be improved.

FIG. 69 is a view for explaining the operation at the time of WIDE standby in the second lens return processing, and FIG. 70 is a view for explaining the operation at the time of TELE standby in the second lens return processing. FIGS. 71 to 75 show flowcharts of the second lens drive process.

As shown in S2600 in FIG. 71, in the second lens drive process, a drive preparation process is first performed, and the motor to be driven is the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 (hereinafter referred to as “focus motor” as appropriate). ) Is selected. Then, the flow shifts to S2602, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S2604),
After waiting for 10 ms (S2606), the state is set in which voltage output to the focus motor can be performed (S2608).

Then, after waiting for 1 ms (S2610),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S2
612). The change of the operation mode to the high-speed mode is performed, for example, by changing the reference clock of the CPU 200.

Then, the lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM
ERROR1) is reset (S2614), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S2).
616), and the focus error is reset (S261).
8), HP (Home Position) detection is reset (S2620).

[0458] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2622, where it is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in the power on / off temperature measurement process (see S112 in Fig. 19) is higher than or equal to the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature, high-temperature focus drive energization time data (E_T_LD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S2624).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2622 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
It is determined whether or not (MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S2626). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S2630). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low-temperature set temperature, room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S2628).

[0460] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2632, where focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time. And the terminal LHP
The input of IN is read (S2634). And
It is determined whether the lens barrel position is equal to or greater than Z3 (S263).
6) When it is determined that the lens barrel position is not equal to or greater than Z3, it is determined that the lens barrel position is Z2, and the HP fall is set (S2638).

Then, it is determined whether terminal LHPIN is at H or not (S2640). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at H, then the flow shifts to S2810 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at H, the flow shifts to S2644.

By the way, in S2636, the lens barrel position is Z
When it is determined that the number is 3 or more, the HP rising is set (S2642). And terminal LHPIN
Is determined to be L (S2643). Terminal L
When it is determined that the HPIN is not L,
Move to 2810. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S2644.

In S2644, 0 is set as the focus count 0. And focus count 1
Is set as the focus count 2 (S2646), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S2648), and 0 is set as the focus count pulse (S265).
0), 0 is set as the focus count HP (S2652), and 0 is set as the focus count SUM (S2654).

Here, “focus count 0”, “focus count 1”, “focus count 2”,
“Focus count pulse”, “focus count HP” and “focus count SUM” are the same as those in the first lens drive process described above.

Then, the flow shifts to S2656 in FIG. 72, where 0 is set as focus count 0. And
Focus drive HP count data (EP HP) is set as the focus count HP (S2658).
As focus count SUM, focus drive HP count data (EP HP), drive pulse (DRV PLS), focus drive backlash count data (EP FCGB), focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN), and focus drive The sum of all the overpitch numbers (CFCOV) at the time is set (S2660).

As the focus count 1, the value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (EP LD2N1) and adding 20 ((EP LD2N1 * 2) +20) is subtracted from the focus count SUM. It is set (S2662).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0 (S2664). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not less than 0, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S2666).

Then, as the focus count pulse, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S266).
8). Then, the value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S2670). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S2672). When it is determined that there is a surplus, the focus count 2 is set as
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S2674), and the flow shifts to S2676. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S2676, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S2694 in FIG. 73.

If it is determined in S2664 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus drive 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S2678).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S2680). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) minus the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) is set (S2682). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1, and the flow shifts to S2694 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2680 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus drive pulse pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S2686).

[0472] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2688, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S2810 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S2).
690), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S2692). Then, the flow shifts to S2694 in FIG. 73.

[0473] In S2694, the terminal LPIIN (see Fig. 16) for receiving the output of the detector 96 is read.
It is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L (S26).
96). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is reset (S2700). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S2698).

[0474] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2702, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L,
2 is set to H, and the reverse rotation drive is performed (S270).
4).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S2706). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S2710). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has not been set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S2708). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0476] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2712, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S2724. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime has not been set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S2714). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S2716).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has been set (S2718). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has been set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The process is performed (S2722). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S2720). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0478] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2724, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether the P detection flag has been reset (S2726). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, an LR2 HP error is set (S2728), and the flow shifts to S2810 in FIG. I do.

If it is determined in S2726 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S2730). When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is set, the process proceeds to S281 in FIG.
Move to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is not set, the process proceeds to S27 of FIG.
Move to 32.

[0480] At S2732, a process of reading the terminal LHPIN is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the lens barrel position is equal to or more than Z3 (S2734). If it is determined that the lens barrel position is not equal to or more than Z3, it is determined that the lens barrel position is Z2, and the HP rising is set ( S274
0).

Then, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S2742). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at L, then the flow shifts to S2810 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S2744.

By the way, in S2734, the lens barrel position is Z
If it is determined to be 3 or more, the HP falling is set (S2736). And terminal LHPIN
Is H (S2738). Terminal L
If it is determined that HPIN is not H,
Move to 2810. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at H, the flow shifts to S2744.

In S2744, focus drive HP count data (EP HP) is set as focus count 0,
Focus drive backlash count data (EP FC
GB), the value obtained by adding the focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN) and the number of overpitches at the time of focus drive (CFCOV) are set. Then, 0 is set as the focus count HP (S2746), and the focus standby position pitch count data (EP TAIKI) is set as the focus count SUM.
Is set (S2748).

Then, the value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and subtracting 20 pitches from the focus count SUM is set as the focus count 1 (S2750).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is less than or equal to 0 (S2752). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not less than 0, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S2754).

The focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N) is used as the focus count pulse.
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S275).
6). Then, the value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S2758). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S2760). When it is determined that there is a surplus, the focus count 2 is set as
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S2762), and the flow shifts to S2764. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S2764, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S2782 in FIG. 75.

If it is determined in S2752 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus drive 2 sets the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) as the focus count 2.
Is set (S2766).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S2768). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) minus the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) is set (S2770). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 and the flow shifts to S2782 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2768 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus drive pulse pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S2774).

[0490] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2776, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S2810 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S2).
778), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S2780). Then, the flow shifts to S2782 in FIG. 75.

In S2782, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, and the output of DC2 is H
And the normal rotation drive is performed (S2784).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S2786). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S2790). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has not been set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S2788). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0493] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2792, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S2802. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime has not been set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S2794). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S2796).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S2797). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The process is performed (S2800). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S2798). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0495] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S2802, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether the flag of P detection has been reset (S2804), and when it is determined that the flag of HP detection has been reset, a TAIKI error of LR2 is set (S2806), and the flow shifts to S2810.

In S2810, a focus error is set. Then, a lens barrel error is set (S281).
2), recovery prohibition is set (S2814). Then, control goes to a step S2816.

If it is determined in S2804 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S2808). If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S2810. On the other hand, if it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, the flow shifts to S2816.

In S2816, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And terminal LHPIN
Is set to the output port (S2818), after waiting for 2 ms (S2820), the focus power is reset (S2822), the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, and the driver unit 219 does not operate (S2820).
2824), the operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S2826), and a focus error EEPROM writing process is performed (S2828). The focus error EEPROM writing process is a process of writing a focus error into the EEPROM 218 after focus driving. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

Then, after the focus error EEPROM writing processing, the second lens return processing ends.

As described above, according to the second lens return processing, as shown in FIG. 69, when the second lens group 102 (focus) is driven in reverse from the WIDE standby position,
After detecting the HP (home position) serving as the reference position, pulse drive control with a low speed is performed. For this reason,
It is possible to prevent the second lens group 102 from colliding with the stopper due to the momentum of the movement, and it is possible to avoid a serious failure such as a gear being bitten by the collision and being unable to be inverted.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when moving the second lens group 102, the first speed control or the 0th speed control with a lower speed than DC driving is performed before passing through the HP. For this reason, HP can be accurately detected. Thereby, the movement of the second lens group 102 in focusing is performed precisely, and the focusing accuracy can be improved.

Next, the barrier closing process will be described.

The barrier closing process is performed as one of the SM closing processes performed by operating the main switch 16 (see FIG. 28), and the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 is driven to close the barrier 83. Processing.

FIG. 76 is a view for explaining the operation at the time of WIDE standby in the barrier closing process, and FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the operation at the time of TELE standby in the barrier closing process. 78 to 84 show flowcharts of the barrier closing process. In addition, FIG.
FIG. 90 shows a flowchart of a barrier closing operation focus drive process in the barrier closing process.

As shown in S3000 of FIG. 78, in the barrier closing process, first, 1 is set as an HP (home position) chatter counter. Then, drive preparation processing is performed, and the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 is selected as the motor to be driven (S3002). Then, the flow shifts to S3004, where the output of parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is L, and motor 95 is in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S3006), and after waiting for 10 ms (S3008), the voltage output to the focus motor is enabled (S3010).

Then, after waiting for 1 ms (S3012),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S3
014). The change of the operation mode to the high-speed mode is performed, for example, by changing the reference clock of the CPU 200.

Then, lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM
ERROR1) is reset (S3016), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S3).
018), the focus error is reset (S302)
0), HP (home position) detection is reset (S3022).

[0508] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3024, where the barrier drive focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set to 00.
It is determined whether or not h is set. When it is determined that 00h is not set as the barrier operation focus drive energizing time, the barrier operation focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set to twice as the focus energizing time (S3026). Then, control goes to a step S3038.

On the other hand, when it is determined that 00h is set as the focus drive energizing time for barrier operation, the flow shifts to S3028, where a power on / off temperature measurement process (FIG. 1)
It is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in S112 of S9 is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). If it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature, the high-temperature focus drive energization time data (ETLD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S3).
032).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3028 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S3030). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S3036). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low-temperature set temperature, room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S3034).

In the high-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONH), a time shorter than the room-temperature focus drive energization time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set. Also, focus drive energizing time data at room temperature (ET
LD2MONM) is the focus drive energizing time data (E
(T LD2MONL) is set.

[0512] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3038, where focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time. And the terminal LHP
The input of IN is read (S3040). And
The HP falling is set (S3042).

Then, it is determined whether or not the past barrel position is not less than Z3 (S3044). If it is determined that the past barrel position is not more than Z3, it is determined that the past barrel position is Z2, and the terminal It is determined whether or not LHPIN is H (S3046). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at H, then the flow shifts to S3330 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at H,
The process moves to S3048.

If it is determined in S3044 that the lens barrel position in the past is equal to or larger than Z3, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S3047). Terminal LHPIN
Is not L, it is determined that S3330 in FIG.
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S3048.

[0515] In S3048, 0 is set as the focus count 0. And focus count 1
Is set to 0 (S3050), 0 is set to focus count 2 (S3052), and 0 is set to the focus count pulse (S305).
4).

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3056 in FIG. 79, where 0 is set as the focus count HP and 0 is set as the focus count SUM (S305).
8).

Here, “focus count 0” means
It means the count (pitch) of the 0th speed control (see FIGS. 76 and 77). "Focus count 1" is the first
It means the count (pitch) of the speed control (see FIGS. 76 and 77). “Focus count 2” means the count (pitch) of the second speed control (see FIGS. 76 and 77). “Focus count pulse” means pulse drive control (count (pitch) in FIGS. 76 and 77).

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, in the focus drive (drive of the second lens group 102), the second lens group 1
Speed control for changing the drive speed in accordance with the movement position of No. 02 is performed. As the speed control, the above-described 0th speed control, 1st speed control,
Speed control, second speed control, and pulse drive control are set. The pulse drive control is a lower speed control than the second speed control. The second speed control is a lower speed control than the first speed control. The 0th speed control and the 2nd speed control are controls of the same speed.

[0519] The "focus count HP" means the count (pitch) of the pulse drive control (see Figs. 76 and 77) after the HP is detected. "Focus count S
"UM" means the total pitch number of the drive. Here, the “pitch” means a half of one pulse, and one pulse is obtained at two pitches.

Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3060 in FIG. 79, where 0 is set as focus count 0. And
The focus drive HP count data (EP HP) is set as the focus count HP (S3062).
As focus count SUM, focus drive HP count data (EP HP), focus standby position pitch count data (EP TAIKI), focus drive backlash count data (EP FCGB), and focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (D
P MARGIN) is set (S30)
64).

Then, it is determined whether or not the past lens barrel position is not less than Z3 (S3066). If it is determined that the past lens barrel position is not more than Z3, the flow shifts to S3070. On the other hand, when it is determined that the past lens barrel position is equal to or larger than Z3, a value obtained by adding the pitch count data (EP HP H) of the focus drive HP “H” section to the focus count SUM as the focus count 1 is set. Is performed (S3068), and the flow shifts to S3070.

In S3070, as the focus count 1, the focus drive first speed count data (EP LD
2N1) doubled and 20 added ((EP LD2N1 * 2) +2
(0) is subtracted from the focus count SUM.

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S3072). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not less than 0, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S3074).

[0524] The focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S307).
6). Then, as the focus count 1, a value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set (S3078). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S3080). When it is determined that there is a surplus, a value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set as the focus count 2 (S3).
082), and the flow shifts to S3084. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S3084, where the focus count 1 is set as the event count.

Then, it is determined whether or not the past lens barrel position is equal to or larger than Z3 (S3086). Past lens barrel position is Z3
If it is determined that the above is the case, the focus drive first
As the speed lower limit pulse time (ET LD2LLN1), a value obtained by adding the focus drive first speed lower speed pulse time (ET LN1 HOSEI) to the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (ET LD2LLN1) is set (S3088). Then, as the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN1), the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E TLD2LU
N1) focus drive first speed deceleration time (ET LN1 HOSE
The value obtained by adding I) is set (S3090). Then, the flow shifts to S3108 in FIG. 80.

On the other hand, in S3086, the previous lens barrel position is
When it is determined that it is not more than 3, S310 in FIG.
Move to 8.

If it is determined in step S3072 that the focus count 1 is equal to or smaller than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S3092).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S3094). When it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) minus the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) is set (S3096). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S3098), and S in FIG.
Move to 3108.

If it is determined in S3094 that the focus count 2 is equal to or smaller than 0, the focus count pulse is set to the focus count SUM.
From the focus drive brake pitch count data (E
P FCBRK) is set (S310).
0).

Then, the flow shifts to S3102, where it is determined whether the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. If it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S3104). . Then, 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S3106), and the flow shifts to S3108 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or smaller than 0, the flow shifts to S3330 in FIG.

At S3108 in FIG. 80, the terminal LPIIN (see FIG. 16) receiving the output of the detector 96 is read, and it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S3110). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is reset (S3112). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S3114).

[0532] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3116, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L,
2 is set to H and reverse drive is performed (S311).
8).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S3120). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S3122). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S3124). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0534] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3126, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S3138. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime is not set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S3128). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S3130).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S3132). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S3134). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S3136). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0536] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3138, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And S
The flow shifts to 3140, where the reading process of the EEPROM 218 is performed. In this read process, the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN1) and the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) are read and set to the original values.

Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection flag has been reset (S3142). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, a barrier (BARI) HP error is set (S3144). ),
The process moves to S3330 in FIG.

If it is determined in S3142 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S3146). When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is set, the process proceeds to S333 in FIG.
Move to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, the terminal LHPIN
Is determined to be L (S3148). Terminal L
When it is determined that HPIN is L,
It moves to 3154. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at L, the HP chatter counter
Is determined (S3150).

If it is determined in S3150 that the HP chatter countermeasure counter is 0, the process proceeds to S333 in FIG.
Move to 0. On the other hand, when it is determined that the HP chatter counter is not 0, the value of the HP chatter counter is reduced by 1, and the flow shifts to S3048 in FIG.

At S3154 in FIG. 81, the lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM ERROR1) is reset. Then, the lens barrel control error code 2 (EZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S3156), the focus error is reset (S3158), and the HP (home position) detection is reset (S3160).

Then, the terminal LHPIN is read (S3162), and the rising edge of the HP is set (S3164). Then, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S3166). When it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at L, the flow shifts to S3330 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S3168.

At S3168, 0 is set as focus count 0. And the focus count H
P is set to 0 (S3170), and as the focus count SUM, gear engagement pitch count data (D PGEAR KAMI) at the time of focus reverse rotation and forward rotation, and LHPIN rising barrier stopper pitch count data (DP B
ARRIER) and the data obtained by adding the barrier close processing pitch count correction data (EP BARI CL HOSEI) are set (S3172).

Then, the value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and subtracting 20 pitches from the focus count SUM is set as the focus count 1 (S3174). Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S3176). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not 0 or less, the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N) is set as the focus count 2.
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling 1) is set (S3178).

[0544] The focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S318).
0). Then, a value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S3182). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S3184). When it is determined that there is a surplus, the focus count 2 is set as
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S3186), and the flow shifts to S3188. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S3188, where a focus count of 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S3206 in FIG. 82.

[0545] If it is determined in S3176 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S3190).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S3192). When it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S3196). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 and the flow shifts to S3206 in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3192 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus drive pulse pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S3198).

[0555] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3200, where it is determined whether the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. If it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S3330 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not 0 or less, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S3).
202), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S3204). Then, the flow shifts to S3206 in FIG. 82.

In S3206, 2 seconds is set as the barrier lock timer. Then, the terminal LPIIN (see FIG. 16) receiving the output of the detector 96 is read (S3208), and it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S3210). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is reset (S3214). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that IN is not L, the terminal LPIIN
Is set (S3212).

[0550] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3216, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is H,
2 is set to H, and the forward drive is performed (S321).
8).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S3220). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the barrier (BARI) first speed control is performed. H start drive processing is performed (S3224). On the other hand, terminal LPII
If it is determined that the N HL flag has not been set, barrier first speed control L start drive processing is performed (S3222). The details of the barrier first speed control H start drive processing and the barrier first speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0555] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3226, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S3240, where a barrier lock (BA
RI LOCK) is set. Then, the flow shifts to S3242. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is not set, it is determined whether the barrier lock timer is overtime (S322).
8) When it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the flow shifts to S3240. If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, then the flow shifts to S3230.

In S3230, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is H, the output of DC1 is H, and the output of DC2 is H
And a brake output state is set (S3232).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S3234). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S3238). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S3236). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0555] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3242, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether the P detection flag has been reset (S3244). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, a barrier HP error is set (S3246), and the flow shifts to S3248.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3244 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the process proceeds to S3224.
The process proceeds to 48, where the main switch state is set to the closed code. Then, the LPIIN overtime is reset (S3250), the barrier lock timer overtime is reset (S3252), 0 is set as the focus count 0 (S3254), and 0 is set as the focus count HP (S3256).

[0556] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3258 in FIG. 83, where the value obtained by adding the creep release pitch count data (DP BARI REV) and the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) is set as the focus count SUM. Then, as the focus count 1, the focus driving SUM
The data obtained by doubling the speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and the data obtained by reducing the pitch by 20 are set (S326).
0). Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0 (S3262).
Is not equal to or less than 0, the focus drive second focus count data (E_P_LD2N1) is doubled from the focus drive second speed count data.
The value obtained by subtracting the speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) is set (S3264).

Then, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S326).
6). Then, a value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S3268). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S3270). When it is determined that there is a surplus, the focus count 2 is set as
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S3272), and the flow shifts to S3274. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S3274, where a focus count of 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S3292 in FIG. 84.

By the way, if it is determined in S3262 that the focus count 1 is 0 or less, the focus count SUM is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S3276).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S3278). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S3282). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 and the flow shifts to S3292 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3278 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus drive pulse pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S3284).

[0562] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3286, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S3330 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not 0 or less, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S3).
288), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S3290). Then, the flow shifts to S3292 in FIG. 84.

In S3292 in FIG. 84, 2 sec is set as the barrier lock timer. And the detector 9
The terminal LPIIN (see FIG. 16) that receives the output of No. 6 is read (S3294), and it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S3296). Terminal LPIIN
Is determined to be L, the H level of the terminal LPIIN
The L flag is reset (S3300). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L,
The HL flag of PIIN is set (S329).
8).

[0564] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3302, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is H,
2 is set to H, and the reverse drive is performed (S330).
4).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S3306). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the barrier first speed control H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S3310). On the other hand, HL of terminal LPIIN
When it is determined that the flag is not set,
A barrier first speed control L start drive process is performed (S33).
08). The details of the barrier first speed control H start drive processing and the barrier first speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0566] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3312, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is set, the LPIIN overtime is reset (S3326), a barrier creep (BARI CREEP) error is set (S3328), and the flow shifts to S3336.
On the other hand, when it is determined in S3312 that the LPIIN overtime is not set, it is determined whether the barrier lock timer is overtime (S3314). If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the flow shifts to S3326. On the other hand, when it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, the flow shifts to S3316.

In S3316, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is H, the output of DC1 is H, and the output of DC2 is H
And a brake output state is set (S3318).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S3320). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S3324). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a braking pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S3322). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

In S3330, a focus error is set. Then, a lens barrel error is set (S3332), and a recovery prohibition is set (S33).
34). Then, the flow shifts to S3336.

In S3336, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, and the output of DC2 is L
And the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S3338).
Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the output port (S
3340) After waiting for 2 ms (S3342), the focus power is reset (S3344), and the driver is turned ON / OFF.
The OFF terminal CE is set to L and the driver unit 219 is not operated (S3346), the operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S3348), and the focus error EEPROM writing process is performed (S33).
50). The focus error EEPROM writing process is to perform a focus error
This is the process of writing to M218. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

Then, after the focus error EEPROM writing processing, the barrier closing processing ends.

As described above, according to the barrier closing processing, as shown in FIG. 77, when the reverse rotation drive (movement from right to left in FIG. 77) is performed from the TELE standby position toward the stopper, the first speed The control speed is set low (S308).
8, S3090). For this reason, when the gears 141 and 143 (see FIG. 10) mesh during the first speed control, it is possible to reduce the noise generated by the meshing.

Also, the focus (second lens group 102)
When the barrier lock timer (BARI LOCK timer: 2 seconds) is started when the barrier is closed by driving the camera forward, the focus drive processing is terminated when the barrier lock timer is overtime. Therefore, even when the barrier drive ring 81 abuts against a barrier stopper formed at the front end portion of the third cylinder 6 or the like, and there is a high or low input to the terminal LPIIN due to slight vibration caused by forward and reverse rotation of the motor 95, The processing can be surely ended.

As shown in FIGS. 76 and 77, according to the barrier closing processing, after the focus is driven to rotate forward to close the barrier, the barrier is separated from the barrier stopper (stopper 6b, see FIG. 9) to release creep. So the focus is moving. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the barrier drive ring 81 abutting against the stopper 6b from being pressed by the barrier stopper for a long time and damaged by creep.

After the focus is reversely driven from the standby position, when the terminal LHPIN is at L (S314).
8) The focus is reversed again. Thus, for example, as shown in FIG. 77, even when chattering occurs in the output of the terminal LHPIN when passing through the HP from the TELE standby position, the focus can be reliably moved to the stopper side. Further, it is not necessary to use a Schmitt circuit having hysteresis as an output detection circuit of the terminal LHPIN, and the output detection circuit can be made inexpensive.

Also, as shown in FIG. 76, when the second lens group 102 (focus) is driven in reverse rotation from the WIDE standby position, after detecting the HP (home position) serving as the reference position, the pulse drive having a low speed is performed. Control is performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the second lens group 102 from colliding with the stopper due to the momentum of the movement, and it is possible to avoid a serious failure such that the gear bites due to the collision and cannot be reversed.

In the above-described barrier processing, the barrier drive ring 81 is moved so as to be separated from the stopper 6b after being brought into contact with the stopper 6b. However, the camera according to the present invention is not limited to such. No, barrier drive ring 8
It may be one that prevents creep damage during movement of the moving member other than 1. For example, after the lens barrel is brought into contact with the stopper and stopped when the lens barrel is retracted or extended, the lens barrel may be moved in the opposite direction to move away from the stopper. in this case,
It is possible to reliably prevent the lens barrel from being pressed by the stopper for a long time and damaged by creep.

Next, each focus drive processing for barrier closing operation in the barrier closing processing will be described.

The barrier first speed control L start drive processing shown in FIG. 85 is the processing performed in S3310 in FIG. 84 of the barrier close processing. In the barrier first speed control L start drive processing, first, as shown in S3500 in FIG. 85, the HP detection is reset. Then, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S350).
2) When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 1, the flow shifts to the barrier second speed control L start drive processing operation in FIG. 87. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 1, falling is set as the event counter mode (S3504).

Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S35).
06), when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN1) is set (S3508). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized, the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) is set as the PI measurement timer (S3510).

Then, 200 ms is set as the LPIIN overtime (S3512), and the terminal LPII
It is determined whether N is H (S3514). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the event count (S3516). When it is determined that 0 is set as the event count, the second barrier shown in FIG.
The process proceeds to the speed control H start drive process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0 is not set as the event count, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S3).
518). If it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminals DC0, DC
It is determined whether DC1 and DC2 are in the energized state (S3520), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are determined.
If it is determined that is in the energized state, S35
Move to 26. On the other hand, parallel terminals DC0, DC1,
When it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of the DC1 is L, the output of the DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3522).

[0583] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
C2 is set to the energized state (S3524). Then, the flow shifts to S3526, where the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the flow shifts to S3564 in FIG. 86.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3518 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime,
It is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2 are energized (S3528). If it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2 are not energized, the flow shifts to S3534. On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. (S3530).

[0585] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S3532). Then, the flow shifts to S3534, where the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN1) is set as the PI measurement timer, and FIG.
The process moves to S3564 in S6.

[0586] By the way, in S3514, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S3536, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the barrier lock timer is overtime (S3538). If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the barrier lock timer overtime is set (S3540), and the processing is performed. To end.

If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S3542). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S3544), and the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S3546).

If it is determined in S3546 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S35
Return to 14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S3548). When it is determined that the brake output state has not been established, the process returns to S3514.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state has been established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3550).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S355)
1). Then, the process returns to S3514.

FIG. 86 shows a flowchart of the barrier first speed control H start drive processing operation.

[0591] The barrier first speed control H start drive process is a process performed in S3308 of Fig. 84 of the barrier close process. This barrier first speed control H start drive processing is performed first
As shown in S3552 in FIG. 86, the HP detection is reset. Then, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S3554). If it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 1, the process proceeds to the barrier second speed control H start drive process of FIG. 88. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 1, rising is set as the event counter mode (S35).
56)

Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S35).
58), when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN1) is set (S3560). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) is set as the PI measurement timer (S3562).

[0593] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3564, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S
3566). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the event count (S3568). When it is determined that 0 is set as the event count, the flow shifts to the barrier second speed control L start drive processing operation in FIG. 87.
On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 has not been set as the event count, the flow shifts to S3512 in FIG.

By the way, in S3566, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not L, then the flow shifts to S3570, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the barrier lock timer is overtime (S3572). If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the barrier lock timer overtime is set (S3574), and the process is performed. To end.

If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S3576). If it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S3578), and the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S3580).

If it is determined in S3580 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S35
Return to 66. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S3582). When it is determined that the state is not the brake output state, the process returns to S3566.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3584).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S358)
6). Then, the process returns to S3566.

FIG. 87 shows a flowchart of the barrier second speed control L start drive processing operation.

In the barrier second speed control L start drive processing, as shown in S3588 in FIG.
It is determined whether or not 0 is set. When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 2, the flow shifts to barrier pulse drive control L start drive processing in FIG. 89. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 2, the focus count 2 is set as the focus count (S3590).

Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S35).
92) When it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the focus driving second speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN2) is set (S3594). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer (S3596).

Then, 200 ms is set as the LPIIN overtime (S3598), and the terminal LPII
It is determined whether or not N is H (S3600). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S3602), and it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count (S3604). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count, the flow shifts to barrier pulse drive control H start drive processing in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S
3606). If it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminals DC0, DC
It is determined whether DC1 and DC2 are in the energized state (S3616), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are determined.
If it is determined that is in the energized state, S36
Move to 22. On the other hand, parallel terminals DC0, DC1,
When it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of the DC1 is L, the output of the DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3618).

Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
C2 is set to the energized state (S3620). Then, the flow shifts to S3622, where the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the flow shifts to S3652 in FIG. 88.

If it is determined in S3606 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime,
It is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state (S3608). If it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the flow shifts to S3614. On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. (S3610).

[0605] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S3612). Then, the flow shifts to S3614, where the focus drive second speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN2) is set as the PI measurement timer, and FIG.
Then, the flow shifts to S3652 in Step 8.

By the way, in S3600, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S3624, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the barrier lock timer is overtime (S3626). If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the barrier lock timer overtime is set (S3628), and the processing is performed. To end.

If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S3630). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S3632), and the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S3634).

If it is determined in S3634 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S3634.
Return to 00. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
, The output of DC1 is H, the output of DC2 is H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S3636). When it is determined that the brake output state has not been established, the process returns to S3600.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 becomes L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S3638).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S364)
0). Then, the process returns to S3600.

FIG. 88 shows a flowchart of the barrier second speed control H start drive processing operation.

In the barrier second speed control H start drive processing operation, as shown in S3642 of FIG. 88, first, it is determined whether 0 is set as the focus count 2 or not. When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 2, the flow shifts to barrier pulse drive control H start drive processing in FIG. 90. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 2, the focus count 2 is set as the focus count (S3644).

Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S36).
46), when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the focus drive second speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN2) is set (S3648). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer (S3650).

[0613] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3652, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S
3654). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S36).
56) It is determined whether 0 is set as the event count (S3658). When it is determined that 0 is set as the event count, the flow shifts to barrier pulse drive control L start drive processing in FIG. 89. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 has not been set as the event count, the flow shifts to S3598 in FIG. 87.

[0614] By the way, in S3654, the terminal LPII
When it is determined that N is not L, the flow shifts to S3660, where HP detection processing is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the barrier lock timer is overtime (S3662). If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the barrier lock timer overtime is set (S3664), and the processing is performed. To end.

If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S3666). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S3668), and the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S3670).

If it is determined in S3670 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S3670.
Return to 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S3672). When it is determined that the state is not the brake output state, the process returns to S3654.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake is in the output state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 becomes L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3674).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S367)
6). Then, the process returns to S3654.

FIG. 89 shows a flowchart of barrier pulse drive control L start drive processing.

The barrier pulse drive control L start drive processing is as follows.
As shown in S3678 of FIG. 89, a focus count pulse is set as a focus count. Then, it is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2 are energized (S3680). If it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2 are not energized, focus is set as the PI measurement timer. The brake time (E TBARIBRAKE) is set (S3
682). On the other hand, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2
Is determined to be in the energized state, the focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMO
N) is set (S3684).

[0739] Then, 200 ms is set as the LPIIN overtime (S3686), and the terminal LPII
It is determined whether or not N is H (S3688). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S3690), and it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count (S3692). 0 as focus count
Is determined to be set, LPIIN
Is set (S3694), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count, the parallel terminal D
It is determined whether or not C0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state (S3696), and the parallel terminals DC0 and DC2 are determined.
1. When it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the flow shifts to S3702. On the other hand, the parallel terminal DC
When it is determined that 0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3698). .

[0622] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S3700). Then, the flow shifts to S3702, where the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the flow advances to S373 in FIG. 90.
Move to 8.

[0624] By the way, in S3688, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S3704, where HP detection processing is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the barrier lock timer is overtime (S3706). If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the barrier lock timer overtime is set (S3708), and the processing is performed. To end.

If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S3710). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S3712), and the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether or not the PI measurement timer is overtime (S3714).

If it is determined in S3714 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the flow advances to S36.
Return to 88. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S3716).

If it is determined in S3716 that the brake output state has not been established, the output of parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and motor 95 is in a standby state ( S3718). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the brake output state is set (S3720), and the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S372).
2). Then, the flow returns to S3688.

If it is determined in S3716 that the brake is in the output state, the parallel terminal DC
The output of 0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3724), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are set to an energized state (S3726). And as a PI measurement timer,
The focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set (S3728). Then, the flow returns to S3688.

FIG. 90 shows a flowchart of the barrier pulse drive control H start drive processing operation.

The barrier pulse drive control H start drive processing is as follows.
As shown in S3730 in FIG. 90, a focus count pulse is set as a focus count. Then, it is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized (S3732). If it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the focus is set as the PI measurement timer. The brake time (E TBARIBRAKE) is set (S3
734). On the other hand, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2
Is determined to be in the energized state, the focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMO
N) is set (S3736).

[0630] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S3738, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S
3740). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S
3742), it is determined whether 0 is set as the focus count or not (S3744). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count, the HL flag of LPIIN is reset (S3).
746), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count, the parallel terminal D
It is determined whether or not C0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state (S3748), and the parallel terminals DC0 and DC2 are determined.
1. When it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the flow shifts to S3754. On the other hand, the parallel terminal DC
When it is determined that 0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3750). .

[0632] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S3752). Then, the flow shifts to S3754, where the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the flow advances to S368 in FIG. 89.
Move to 6.

[0638] By the way, in S3740, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not L, then the flow shifts to S3756, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the barrier lock timer is overtime (S3758). If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is overtime, the barrier lock timer overtime is set (S3760), and the processing is performed. To end.

If it is determined that the barrier lock timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S3762). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S3764), and the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S3766).

If it is determined in S3766 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process goes to S3766.
Return to 40. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S3768).

If it is determined in S3768 that the brake output state has not been established, the output of parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and motor 95 is in a standby state ( S3770). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S3772), and a focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as a PI measurement timer (S377).
4). Then, the process returns to S3740.

If it is determined in S3768 that the brake output state is established, the parallel terminal DC
The output of 0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, the motor 95 is in a standby state (S3776), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are set to an energized state (S3778). And as a PI measurement timer,
The focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set (S3780). Then, the process returns to S3740.

Next, the barrier opening processing will be described.

The barrier opening process is performed as one process of the open process performed by operating the main switch 16 (see FIG. 34), and drives the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 to open the barrier 83. It is.

FIG. 91 is a view for explaining the operation in the barrier closing process, and FIGS. 92 to 96 are flowcharts of the barrier opening process.

As shown in S4000 in FIG. 92, in the barrier closing process, first, a drive preparation process is performed, and the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 is selected as a motor to be driven. Then, the flow shifts to S4002, where a parallel terminal D is connected.
The output of C0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, and the output of DC2 is L
And the motor 95 is in a standby state. And terminal L
HPIN is set to the input port (S4004), 1
After waiting for 0 ms (S4006), a state is set in which voltage output to the focus motor is possible (S4008).

[0645] After the 1 ms wait (S4010),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S4
012). Then, lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM E
RROR1) is reset (S4014), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S40).
16), the focus error is reset (S401)
8), HP (Home Position) detection is reset (S4020).

[0643] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4022, where 00 is set as the focus drive energizing time for barrier operation (ET BARIMON).
It is determined whether or not h is set. When it is determined that 00h is not set as the barrier operation focus drive energizing time, the barrier operation focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set as the focus energizing time (S4024). Then, control goes to a step S4036.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 00h is set as the focus drive energizing time for barrier operation, the flow shifts to S4026, where a power on / off temperature measurement process (FIG. 1)
It is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in S112 of S9 is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature, the high-temperature focus drive energization time data (ETLD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S4).
030).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4026 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S4028). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S4034). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low temperature set temperature, the room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S4032).

[0646] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4036, where doubled focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time. Then, the input of the terminal LHPIN is read (S403).
8). Then, the HP falling is set (S40).
40).

[0647] Then, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at H or not (S4042). When it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at H, focus initial processing is performed (S4044). Details of the focus initial processing will be described later. Then, the barrier opening process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4042 that the terminal LHPIN is at H, the focus count
Is set to 0 (S4046). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S404).
8), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S
4050), 0 is set as the focus count pulse (S4052), 0 is set as the focus count HP (S4054), and the focus count S
0 is set as UM (S4056).

Here, “focus count 0”, “focus count 1”, “focus count 2”,
The “focus count pulse”, “focus count HP”, and “focus count SUM” are the same as those in the above-described second lens drive process.

[0650] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4058 in FIG. 93, where 0 is set as the focus count 0. And
Focus drive HP count data (EPHP) is set as the focus count HP (S4060).
As the focus count SUM, focus drive HP count data (EP HP), LHPIN rising barrier stopper pitch count data (DP BARR)
IER), barrier opening pitch count correction data (EPB
ARI OP HOSEI) and the focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN) are added, and the value obtained by subtracting the creep release pitch count data (DP BARI REV) is set (S4062).

Then, as the focus count 1, a value obtained by subtracting 20 from twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) is set from the focus count SUM (S4064).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S4066). When it is determined that the focus count 1 is not 0 or less, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S4068).

[0655] Then, as the focus count pulse, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S407).
0). Then, the value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S4072). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S4074).
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S4076), and the flow shifts to S4078.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no remainder,
The flow shifts to S4078, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. The focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (ET LD2LLN1) is used as the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (ET LD2LLN1).
Focus drive first speed deceleration time (ET LN1 HOSEI)
Is set (S4080). And
Focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (ET LD2LUN
1) Focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E
T LD2LUN1) focus drive first speed deceleration time (ET
(LN1 HOSEI) is set (S408).
2). Then, the flow shifts to S4100 in FIG. 94.

[0655] If it is determined in S4066 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S4084).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S4086). When it is determined that the focus count 2 is not less than 0, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S4088). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1, and the flow shifts to S4100 in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4086 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus drive pulse pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S4092).

[0658] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4094, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S4216 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not equal to or smaller than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S4).
096), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S4098). Then, the flow shifts to S4100 in FIG. 94.

At S4100, the terminal LPIIN (see FIG. 16) for receiving the output of the detector 96 is read.
It is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L (S41).
02). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is reset (S4106). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4104).

[0660] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4108, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L,
2 is set to H and reverse drive is performed (S411).
0).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S4112). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed. Is performed (S4116). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has not been set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S4114). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0660] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4118, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S4130. On the other hand, LPII
If it is determined that the N overtime has not been set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S4120). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S4122).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4124). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The process is performed (S4128). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S4126). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0666] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4130, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And S
Then, the flow shifts to 4132, where a reading process from the EEPROM 218 is performed. In this read process, the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN1) and the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) are read and set to the original values.

Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection flag has been reset (S4134). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, a barrier open (BARI OPEN) error is set (S41).
36), the flow shifts to S4212 in FIG.

If it is determined in S4134 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S4138). When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is set, the process proceeds to S421 in FIG.
Move to 2. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is not set, the process proceeds to S41 in FIG.
Move to 40.

At S4140, a process of reading the terminal LHPIN is performed. Then, the HP rising is set (S4142), and it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S4144). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at L, then the flow shifts to S4212 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S4146.

In S4146, focus drive HP count data (EP HP) is set as focus count 0,
Focus drive backlash count data (EP FC
GB), the value obtained by adding the focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN) and the number of overpitches at the time of focus drive (CFCOV) are set. Then, 0 is set as the focus count HP (S4148), and focus standby position pitch count data (EP TAIKI) is set as the focus count SUM (S4150).

[0669] As the focus count 1, a value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and subtracting 20 pitches from the focus count SUM is set (S4152).

[0670] Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S4154). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not 0 or less, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S4156).

Then, as the focus count pulse, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S415).
8). Then, the value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S4160). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S4162). When it is determined that there is a surplus, the focus count 2 is set as
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S4164), and the flow shifts to S4166. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S4166, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S4184 in FIG. 96.

By the way, if it is determined in S4154 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S4168).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S4170). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not less than 0, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) minus the focus drive brake pitch count data (EPFCBRK) is set (S4172). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S4174), and S in FIG. 96 is set.
It moves to 4184.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4170 that the focus count 2 is equal to or less than 0, the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S4176).

[0675] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4178, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S4212 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not equal to or smaller than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S4).
180), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S4182). Then, the flow shifts to S4184 in FIG. 96.

[0676] In S4184, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, and the output of DC2 is H
And the normal rotation drive is performed (S4186).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S4188). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S4192). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S4190). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0678] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4194, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S4206. On the other hand, LPII
If it is determined that the N overtime is not set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S4196). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S4198).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4200). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S4204). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S4202). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0680] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4206, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether or not the P detection flag has been reset (S4208). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, a barrier wait (BARI TAIKI) error is set (S4210), and the flow shifts to S4212. I do.

At S4212, a focus error is set. Then, a lens barrel error is set (S421).
4), the recovery prohibition is set (S4216). Then, control goes to a step S4222.

If it is determined in S4208 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S4218). If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S4212. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, an open code is set as the main switch state (S4220). And S
It moves to 4222.

In S4222, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And terminal LHPIN
Is set to the output port (S4224), and after waiting for 2 ms (S4226), the focus power supply is reset (S4228), the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, and the driver unit 219 does not operate (S4228).
4230), the operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S4232), and a focus error EEPROM writing process is performed (S4234). The focus error EEPROM writing process is a process of writing a focus error into the EEPROM 218 after focus driving. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

[0684] After the focus error EEPROM writing processing, the barrier opening processing ends.

As described above, according to the barrier opening process, as shown in FIG. 91, the second lens group 102 (focus)
When reverse driving is performed, after detecting an HP (home position) serving as a reference position, pulse drive control with a low speed is performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the second lens group 102 from colliding with the stopper due to the momentum of the movement, and it is possible to avoid a serious failure such that the gear bites due to the collision and cannot be reversed.

Next, the focus tele standby movement processing (FOCUS tele standby movement processing) will be described.

FIG. 97 is a view for explaining the operation in the focus TELE standby movement processing. 98 to 102 show flowcharts of the focus TELE standby movement processing.

As shown in FIG. 97, focus TELE
In the standby process, when the lens barrel position is moved from Z1, Z2 to Z3 or more by operating the TELE switch 19, the second lens group 102 (focus) is moved from the WIDE standby position to the T position.
This is a process of moving to the ELE standby position.

As shown in S4300 of FIG. 98, in the focus TELE standby movement process, first, a drive preparation process is performed, and the focus drive unit 221 is used as a motor to be driven.
Motor 95 is selected. Then, the flow shifts to S4302, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S4304), and after waiting for 10 ms (S4306),
A state is set in which voltage output to the focus motor is possible (S4308).

Then, after waiting for 1 ms (S4310),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S4
312). Then, lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM E
RROR1) is reset (S4314), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S43).
16), the focus error is reset (S431)
8), HP (home position) detection is reset (S4320).

[0691] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4322, where it is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in the power on / off temperature measurement process (see S112 in FIG. 19) is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). If it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature, the high-temperature focus drive energization time data (E_T_LD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S4324).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4322 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S4326). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S4330). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low temperature set temperature, room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S4328).

Note that the high-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONH) is set shorter than the room-temperature focus drive energization time data (E_T_LD2MONM). Also, focus drive energizing time data at room temperature (ET
LD2MONM) is the focus drive energizing time data (E
(T LD2MONL) is set.

[0694] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4332, where focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time. And the terminal LHP
The input of IN is read (S4334). And
The HP falling is set (S4342).

[0695] Then, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at H or not (S4343). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at H, then the flow shifts to S4524 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at H, the flow shifts to S4344.

[0696] In S4344, 0 is set as the focus count 0. And focus count 1
Is set to 0 (S4346), 0 is set to the focus count 2 (S4348), and 0 is set to the focus count pulse (S435).
0), 0 is set as the focus count HP (S4352), and 0 is set as the focus count SUM (S4354).

Here, “focus count 0”, “focus count 1”, “focus count 2”,
The “focus count pulse”, “focus count HP”, and “focus count SUM” are the same as those in the above-described second lens drive process.

[0699] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4356 in FIG. 99, where 0 is set as the focus count 0. And
The focus drive HP count data (EPHP) is set as the focus count HP (S4358).
As focus count SUM, focus drive HP count data (EP HP), focus standby position pitch count data (EP TAIKI), focus drive backlash count data (EP FCGB), and focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (D
P MARGIN) is set (S43)
60).

The focus count 1 is obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (EP LD2N1) and adding 20 ((EP LD2N1 * 2) +20) to the focus count SUM. It is set (S4362).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S4364). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not less than 0, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S4366).

Then, as the focus count pulse, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S436).
8).

[0707] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4376, where as focus count 1, focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N) doubled from the focus count SUM.
After subtracting 1), the value obtained by dividing by 2 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a remainder (S4378). When it is determined that there is a remainder, a value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set as the focus count 2 (S4380), and the flow shifts to S4382. on the other hand,
If it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S4382, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S4410 in FIG. 100.

If it is determined in S4364 that the focus count 1 is less than or equal to 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S4384).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S4386). When it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S4388). Then, the flow shifts to S4396, where 0 is set as the focus count 1. Then, the flow shifts to S4410 in FIG. 100.

If it is determined in S4386 that the focus count 2 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count SUM is used as the focus count pulse.
From the focus drive brake pitch count data (E
P FCBRK) is set (S439).
8).

[0706] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4400, where it is determined whether the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. If it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S4402). . Then, 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S4406). Then, the flow shifts to S4410 in FIG. 100.

If it is determined in S4400 that the focus count pulse is equal to or smaller than 0, it is determined that the focus count pulse is abnormal, and the flow shifts to S4524 in FIG.

At S4410 in FIG. 100, the terminal LPIIN (see FIG. 16) receiving the output of the detector 96 is read, and it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S4412). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is reset (S4416). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4414).

[0707] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4418, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L,
2 is set to H and reverse drive is performed (S442).
0).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4422). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S4426). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S4424). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0711] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4428, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S4440. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime is not set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S4430). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S4432).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4434). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S4438). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S4436). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0713] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4440, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether the P detection flag has been reset (S4442). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, an HP error of the TELE standby drive is set (S4444), and S4524 in FIG. 102 is set.
Move to

If it is determined in S4442 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S4446). If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the process proceeds to S45 in FIG.
Move to 24. On the other hand, if it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set,
The process moves to 4448.

[0715] In S4448, a process of reading the terminal LHPIN is performed. Then, the HP rising is set (S4456). Then, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S4458). Terminal LHPIN
Is not L, it is determined in S452 of FIG.
Move to 4. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S4460.

In S4460, focus drive HP count data (EP HP) is set as focus count 0,
Focus drive backlash count data (EP FC
GB), the value obtained by adding the focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN) and the number of overpitches at the time of focus drive (CFCOV) are set. Then, 0 is set as the focus count HP (S4462), and the focus count SUM is obtained by adding the pitch count data (EP HP H) and the focus standby position pitch count data (EP TAIKI) of the focus drive HP “H” section. Is set (S4
464).

[0717] As the focus count 1, a value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and subtracting 20 pitches from the focus count SUM is set (S4466). Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S4468). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not less than 0, the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N) is set as the focus count 2.
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling 1) is set (S4470).

[0718] Then, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S447).
2). Then, the value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S4473).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a remainder (S
4474) When it is determined that there is a surplus, a value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set as the focus count 2 (S4476), and the flow shifts to S4478. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no remainder, S
The flow shifts to 4478, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. Then, S4 in FIG.
Move to 496.

If it is determined in S4468 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S4480).

Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S4482). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not less than 0, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S4484). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1, and the flow shifts to S4496 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4482 that the focus count 2 is equal to or less than 0, the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S4488).

[0723] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4490, where it is determined whether the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S4524 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not equal to or smaller than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S4).
492), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S4494). Then, the flow shifts to S4496 in FIG. 102.

[0724] In S4496, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, and the output of DC2 is H
And the normal rotation drive is performed (S4498).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4500). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S4502). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S4501). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0739] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4504, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S4516. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime is not set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S4506). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S4508).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S4510). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S4514). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S4512). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0728] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S4516, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether or not the P detection flag has been reset (S4518). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, a TELE standby error is set (S4522), and the flow shifts to S4524.

At S4524, a focus error is set. Then, a lens barrel error is set (S452).
6), the recovery prohibition is set (S4528). Then, the flow shifts to S4532.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4518 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime is set (S4520). If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S4524. On the other hand, if it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, the flow shifts to S4532.

[0731] In S4532, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And terminal LHPIN
Is set to the output port (S4534), and after waiting for 2 ms (S4536), the focus power is reset (S4538), the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, and the driver unit 219 is set in a non-operational state (S4).
4540), the operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S4542), and a focus error EEPROM writing process is performed (S4544). The focus error EEPROM writing process is a process of writing a focus error into the EEPROM 218 after focus driving. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

[0732] After the focus error EEPROM writing process, the focus TELE standby movement process ends.

[0733] As described above, according to the focus TELE standby movement processing, the second lens group 102 according to the lens barrel position.
By changing the standby position of the second lens group 102 in advance, the moving distance of the second lens group 102 for focusing during photographing can be reduced. Therefore, time parallax at the time of photographing can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 97, when reversely driving the second lens group 102 (focus) from the WIDE standby position, after detecting the HP (home position) serving as the reference position, the pulse drive having a low speed is performed. Control is performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the second lens group 102 from colliding with the stopper due to the momentum of the movement, and it is possible to avoid a serious failure such that the gear bites due to the collision and cannot be reversed.

As shown in FIG. 97, when moving the second lens group 102, before passing through the HP, the first speed control or the 0th speed control, which is slower than the DC drive, is performed. For this reason, HP can be accurately detected.
Thereby, the second lens group 10 in focusing is
2 is performed precisely, and the focusing accuracy can be improved.

Next, the focus WIDE standby movement processing (FOCUS WIDE standby movement processing) will be described.

FIG. 103 is a view for explaining the operation in the focus WIDE standby movement processing. FIGS. 104 to 108 show flowcharts of the focus WIDE standby movement processing.

As shown in FIG. 103, focus WID
The E standby process is performed when the lens barrel position is moved from Z3 to Z7 to Z2 or Z1 by operating the WIDE switch 20.
This is a process of moving the second lens group 102 (focus) from the TELE standby position to the WIDE standby position.

As shown in S5000 in FIG. 104, in the focus WIDE standby movement processing, first, 1 is set as an HP (home position) chatter counter. Then, drive preparation processing is performed, and the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 is selected as the motor to be driven (S5002). Then, the flow shifts to S5004, where the output of parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2
Is set to L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S50).
06) After waiting for 10 ms (S5008), a state in which voltage output to the focus motor is enabled (S501).
0).

[0740] Then, after waiting for 1 ms (S5012),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S5).
014). The change of the operation mode to the high-speed mode is performed, for example, by changing the reference clock of the CPU 200.

[0741] Then, the lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM
ERROR1) is reset (S5016), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S5).
018), the focus error is reset (S502)
0), HP (Home Position) detection is reset (S5022).

[0739] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5024, where it is determined whether the lens barrel position is set to Z1 or not. When it is determined that the lens barrel position is not set to Z1, focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time (S502).
5).

[0739] The flow then moves to S5030. On the other hand, S
At 5024, when it is determined that the lens barrel position is set to Z1, the focus drive brake time data (ET BA
RIBRAKE) is set (S5026). This barrier drive focus drive brake time data (ET BARIBR
AKE) is the focus drive brake time data (ET LD2
BRAKE) A shorter time is set.

[0744] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5028, where the focus drive energizing time for barrier operation (ET BARIMON) is set to 00.
It is determined whether or not h is set. If it is determined that 00h is not set as the barrier operation focus drive energizing time, a value obtained by doubling the barrier operation focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set as the focus energizing time (S5029). Then, control goes to a step S5040.

On the other hand, when it is determined that 00h is set as the focus drive energizing time for barrier operation, the flow shifts to S5030, where a power on / off temperature measurement process (FIG. 1) is performed.
It is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in S112 of S9 is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). If it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high-temperature set temperature, the high-temperature focus drive energization time data (ETLD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S5).
032).

If it is determined in S5030 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S5031). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S5036). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low temperature set temperature, the room temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S5034).

Note that the focus drive energizing time data at high temperature (E_T_LD2MONH) is set shorter than the focus drive energization time data at room temperature (E_T_LD2MONM). Also, focus drive energizing time data at room temperature (ET
LD2MONM) is the focus drive energizing time data (E
(T LD2MONL) is set.

[0748] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5040, where a terminal LHP
The input of IN is read. Then, the HP falling is set (S5042). And the terminal LHPI
It is determined whether or not N is L. Terminal LHPIN is L
If not, the flow shifts to S5250 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the flow shifts to S5048.

[0749] In S5048, 0 is set as the focus count 0. And focus count 1
Is set to 0 (S5050), 0 is set to the focus count 2 (S5052), and 0 is set to the focus count pulse (S505).
4). Then, the flow shifts to S5056, where 0 is set as the focus count HP, and the focus count SU
0 is set as M (S5058).

Here, “focus count 0”, “focus count 1”, “focus count 2”,
The “focus count pulse”, “focus count HP”, and “focus count SUM” are the same as those in the above-described second lens drive process.

Then, the flow shifts to S5060 in FIG. 105,
0 is set as the focus count 0. Then, the focus drive HP is used as the focus count HP.
The count data (EP HP) is set (S506)
2). Then, as the focus count SUM, the focus drive HP count data (EP HP) and the pitch count data (EP HP) in the focus drive HP “H” section
H), focus standby position pitch count data (EPT
AIKI), the focus drive backlash count data (EP FCGB), and the focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN) are all set (S5064).

The focus count 1 is obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (EP LD2N1) and adding 20 ((EP LD2N1 * 2) +20) to the focus count SUM. It is set (S5070).

[0753] Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S5072). If it is determined that the focus count 1 is not 0 or less, the focus drive first speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) from the value obtained by doubling LD2N1) is set (S5074).

[0754] Then, as the focus count pulse, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S507).
6). Then, the value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S5078). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S5080). When it is determined that there is a surplus, a value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set as the focus count 2 (S5).
082), and the process moves to S5084. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S5084, where focus count 1 is set as the event count.

[0755] Then, it is determined whether the lens barrel position is at Z1 or not (S5086). When it is determined that the lens barrel position is Z1, the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (ET LD2LLN1) is used as the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (ET LD2LLN1). HOSEI) is set (S5088). Then, as the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (ET LD2LUN1), a value obtained by adding the focus drive first speed deceleration time (ET LN1 HOSEI) to the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (ET LD2LUN1) is set ( S5090). Then, the flow shifts to S5108 in FIG. 106.

If it is determined in S5086 that the lens barrel position is not at Z1, the flow shifts to S5108 in FIG.

[0757] If it is determined in S5072 that the focus count 1 is equal to or smaller than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S5092).

[0758] Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is less than or equal to 0 (S5094). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not less than 0, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from (LD2N2) is set (S5096). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S5098), and the flow shifts to S5108 in FIG.

[0759] If it is determined in S5094 that the focus count 2 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count pulse is counted as the focus count pulse SUM.
From the focus drive brake pitch count data (E
(P FCBRK) is set (S510)
0).

[0760] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5102, where it is determined whether the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, and when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S5104). . Then, 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S5106), and S5108 in FIG. 106 is set.
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or smaller than 0, the flow shifts to S5250 in FIG.

At S5108 in FIG. 106, the terminal LPIIN (see FIG. 16) receiving the output of the detector 96 is read, and it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S5110). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is reset (S5112). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L, the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S5114).

[0764] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5116, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L,
2 is set to H, and the reverse rotation drive is performed (S511).
8).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S5120). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S5122). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S5124). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0764] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5126, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S5138. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime is not set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S5128). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S5130).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S5132). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S5134). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a braking pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S5136). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0766] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5138, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And S
The flow shifts to 5140, where the reading process of EEPROM 218 is performed. In this read process, the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN1) and the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) are read and set to the original values.

[0767] It is determined whether the HP detection flag has been reset or not (S5142). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, then WI
An HP error for the DE standby drive is set (S514).
4), the flow shifts to S5250 in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5142 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether or not the IN overtime is set (S5146). When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the process proceeds to S52 in FIG.
Move to 50. On the other hand, if it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set,
The process moves to 5162.

In S5162 of FIG. 107, the terminal LHPI
N is read. Then, the rising edge of the HP is set (S5164), and it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S5166). Terminal LHPI
When it is determined that N is not L, it is determined whether the HP chatter counter is 0 (S516).
7). If the HP chatter counter is determined to be 0, the flow shifts to S5250 in FIG. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the HP chatter counter is not 0, the value of the HP chatter counter is reduced by 1 and
The process moves to S5046 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5166 that the terminal LHPIN is at L,
It moves to S5169.

In S5169, focus drive HP count data (EP HP) is set as focus count 0,
Focus drive backlash count data (EP FC
GB), focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN), and the number of overpitches during focus drive (CFCOV) are set. Then, 0 is set as the focus count HP (S5170),
The focus standby position pitch count data (EP TAIKI) is set as the focus count SUM (S5172).

[0772] Then, as the focus count 1, a value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and adding 20 pitches and subtracting it from the focus count SUM is set (S517).
4). Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0 (S5176).
Is not equal to or less than 0, the focus drive second focus count data (E_P_LD2N1) is doubled from the focus drive second speed count data.
The value obtained by subtracting the speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) is set (S5178).

[0772] Then, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S518).
0). Then, a value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S5182). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a surplus (S5184). When it is determined that there is a surplus, the focus count 2 is set as
The value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set (S5186), and the flow shifts to S5188. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no remainder, the flow shifts to S5188, where a focus count of 1 is set as the event count. Then, the flow shifts to S5216 in FIG. 108.

By the way, if it is determined in S5176 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus drive 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S5190).

[0774] Then, it is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S5192). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (EP The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EPFCBRK) from LD2N2) is set (S5196). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1, and the flow shifts to S5216 in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5192 that the focus count 2 is 0 or less, the focus drive pulse pitch count data (EP FC
BRK) is set (S5198).

[0776] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5200, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S5250 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S5).
202), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S5204). Then, the flow shifts to S5216 in FIG. 108.

[0777] In S5216, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And the parallel terminal D
The output of C0 is L, the output of DC1 is H, and the output of DC2 is H
And the normal rotation drive is performed (S5218).

[0778] Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S5220). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing operation is performed. Is performed (S5224). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S5222). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0779] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5226, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S5242. On the other hand, LPII
If it is determined that the N overtime has not been set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S5230). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S5232).

[0780] Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S5234). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S5238). On the other hand, terminal LPI
When it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, a brake pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S5236). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0783] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5242, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether or not the P detection flag has been reset (S5244). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, a WIDE wait (W TAIKI) error is set (S5248).

[0782] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5250, where a focus error is set. Then, a lens barrel error is set (S5252), and recovery prohibition is set (S5).
254). Then, control goes to a step S5256.

[0783] If it is determined in S5244 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime has been set (S5246). If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S5250. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN overtime is not set, the flow shifts to S5256.

[0784] In S5256, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And terminal LHPIN
Is set to the output port (S5258), and after waiting for 2 ms (S5260), the focus power supply is reset (S5262), the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, and the driver unit 219 does not operate (S5264). The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S5266), and the focus error EEPRO is set.
An M writing process is performed (S5268). The focus error EEPROM writing process is a process of writing a focus error into the EEPROM 218 after focus driving. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

[0785] After the focus error EEPROM writing process, the focus WIDE standby movement process ends.

[0786] As described above, according to the focus WIDE standby movement processing, the second lens group 102 according to the barrel position.
By changing the standby position of the second lens group 102 in advance, the moving distance of the second lens group 102 for focusing during photographing can be reduced. Therefore, time parallax at the time of photographing can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 103, when the second lens group 102 (focus) is driven to rotate in reverse from the TELE standby position, an HP (home position) serving as a reference position.
Is detected, pulse drive control with a low speed is performed.
For this reason, it is possible to prevent the second lens group 102 from colliding with the stopper due to the momentum of the movement, and it is possible to avoid a serious failure such that the gear bites due to the collision and cannot be reversed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 103, when the second lens group 102 is moved, the first speed control or the 0th speed control, which is slower than DC driving, is performed before passing the HP to be detected. . For this reason, HP can be accurately detected. Thereby, the movement of the second lens group 102 in focusing is performed precisely, and the focusing accuracy can be improved.

Next, focus initial processing (FOCUS initial processing) will be described.

[0790] FIGS. 109 and 110 are explanatory diagrams of the operation in the focus initial process, and FIGS. 111 to 113 are flowcharts of the focus initial process. In addition, FIG.
FIG. 116 shows a flowchart of a focus initial movement process which is one of the processes during the focus initial process.

The focus initial process is a process performed in the initial process when the battery is loaded (see FIG. 19). The focus initial process detects the position of the second lens group 102 (focus) and drives the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221. Then, the barrier is closed.

As shown in S5500 in FIG. 111, in the focus initial processing, first, drive preparation processing is performed, and the motor 9 of the focus drive unit 221 is used as a motor to be driven.
5 is selected. Then, the flow shifts to S5502, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S55).
04) After waiting for 10 ms (S5506), LHPIN
A reading process is performed (S5508).

[0793] Subsequently, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S5510). When it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, the focus initial movement processing (F
An OCUS initial movement process is performed (S5512). The details of the focus initial movement process will be described later. Then, control goes to a step S5514. On the other hand, if it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not at L, then the flow shifts to S5514.

At S5514, 1 is set as the HP (home position) chatter counter. Then, drive preparation processing is performed, and the motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 is selected as the motor to be driven (S
5516). Then, the flow shifts to S5518, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is L, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S552).
0), after waiting for 10 ms (S5522), a state in which voltage output to the focus motor is enabled (S552).
4).

[0795] After waiting for 1 ms (S5526),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S5).
528). Then, lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM E
RROR1) is reset (S5530), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S55).
32), the focus error is reset (S553).
4), HP (Home Position) detection is reset (S5536).

[0796] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5538, where a focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) for barrier operation of 00 is set.
It is determined whether or not h is set. If it is determined that 00h is not set as the barrier operation focus drive energization time, the barrier operation focus drive energization time (ET BARIMON) is set as the focus energization time (S5540). And S5552
Move to

If it is determined that 00h is set as the barrier operation focus drive energizing time, the flow shifts to S5542, where a power on / off temperature measurement process (FIG. 1) is performed.
It is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in S112 of S9 is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). If it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high-temperature set temperature, the high-temperature focus drive energization time data (ETLD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S5).
546).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5542 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S5544). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S5550). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low temperature set temperature, room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S5548).

[0799] The focus drive energization time data at high temperature (E_T_LD2MONH) is set to a shorter time than the focus drive energization time data at room temperature (E_T_LD2MONM). Also, focus drive energizing time data at room temperature (ET
LD2MONM) is the focus drive energizing time data (E
(T LD2MONL) is set.

[0800] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5552, where focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time. Then, the flow shifts to S5554 in FIG. 112, where 0 is set as focus count 0. Then, 0 as the focus count 1
Is set (S5556), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S5558), and 0 is set as the focus count pulse (S5560).

Then, the falling edge of HP is set (S5566), 0 is set as focus count 0 (S5568), and 0 is set as focus count 1.
Is set (S5570). Then, focus drive HP count data (EPHP) is set as the focus count HP (S5572). As the focus count SUM, focus drive HP count data (EP HP), focus drive backlash count data (EP FCGB), focus drive HP detection margin pitch count data (DP MARGIN), and overpitch number (C FCOV) is set (S5574).

Then, an LHPIN reading process is performed (S5576), and it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L or not (S5578). When it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, a value obtained by adding pitch count data (DP INI HP L) at the time of HP detection L to the focus count SUM is set as the focus count SUM (S5582).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not L, the value obtained by adding the pitch count data (EP HP H) of the focus drive HP “H” section to the focus count SUM is set as the focus count SUM ( S5580).

[0804] Then, the value obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2) from the focus count SUM is set as the focus count 2 (S5584). And the focus count 2 is 0
It is determined whether it is equal to or less than (S5586), and when it is determined that the focus count 2 is not less than 0, the focus drive brake pitch count data (E_P_LD2N2) is used as the focus count pulse. EP FCBRK) is set (S5588). Then, S in FIG.
It moves to 5596.

If it is determined in S5586 that the focus count 2 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count pulse is set to the focus count SUM.
From the focus drive brake pitch count data (E
P FCBRK) is set (S559)
0).

[0806] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5592, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. If it is determined that the focus count pulse is not equal to or less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 2 (step S5592).
5594), and the flow shifts to S5596 in FIG. 113. on the other hand,
If it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0, the flow shifts to S5640 in FIG.

At S5596 in FIG. 113, the terminal LPII
N is read. And the terminal LPIIN is L
Is determined (S5598). Terminal LPI
When it is determined that IN is L, the terminal LPIIN
Are reset (S5600). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L,
The HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S56
02).

[0808] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5604, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H, the output of DC1 is L,
2 is set to H, and the reverse rotation drive is performed (S560).
6).

Then, it is determined whether or not the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S5608). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing is performed Is performed (S5610). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN has not been set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S5612). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0810] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5614, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S5626. On the other hand, LPII
When it is determined that the N overtime is not set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S5616). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S5618).

Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S5620). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. Processing is performed (S5622). On the other hand, terminal LPI
If it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, then a braking pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S5624). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0812] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5626, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And H
It is determined whether or not the P detection flag has been reset (S5628). If it is determined that the HP detection flag has been reset, an initial (INI) HP error is set (S5638). Then, control goes to a step S5640.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5628 that the HP detection flag has not been reset, the LPI
It is determined whether the IN overtime is set (S5630). When it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has not been set, the terminal LHPIN
Is determined to be L (S5632). Terminal L
When HPIN is determined to be L, 3 in FIG.
The process proceeds to 154, where the barrier closing operation is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not L, it is determined whether the HP chatter counter is 0 (S5).
634).

If it is determined in S5634 that the HP chatter countermeasure counter is 0, the flow shifts to S5638. On the other hand, when it is determined that the HP chatter counter is not 0, the value of the HP chatter counter is set to 1
After that, the flow shifts to S5516 in FIG.

[0815] On the other hand, if it is determined in S5630 that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the process proceeds to S5630.
It moves to 5640.

At S5640, a focus error is set. Then, a lens barrel error is set (S564).
2), recovery prohibition is set (S5644). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to L, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S5646). Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the output port (S5648) and waits for 2 ms (S56
After 50), the focus power supply is reset (S56).
52).

[0817] Then, the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, the driver unit 219 is set in a state where it does not operate (S5654), the operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S5656), and the focus error EEPR
OM write processing is performed (S5658). The focus error EEPROM writing process is a process of writing a focus error into the EEPROM 218 after focus driving. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

[0818] After the focus error EEPROM writing process, the focus initializing process ends.

Next, the focus initial movement processing will be described.

As shown in S5700 in FIG. 114, in the focus initial movement process, first, a drive preparation process is performed
The motor 95 of the focus drive unit 221 is selected as the motor to be driven. Then, the flow shifts to S5702, where the output of parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, DC
2 is set to L, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the input port (S5).
704) After waiting for 10 ms (S5706), a state in which voltage output to the focus motor is enabled (S570).
8).

[0821] After waiting for 1 ms (S5710),
The operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the high-speed mode (S5).
712). Then, lens barrel control error code 1 (E ZOOM E
RROR1) is reset (S5714), and the lens barrel control error code 2 (E ZOOM ERROR2) is reset (S57).
16), the focus error is reset (S571)
8), HP (Home Position) detection is reset (S5720).

[0822] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5722, where 00 is set as the focus drive energizing time for barrier operation (ET BARIMON).
It is determined whether or not h is set. If it is determined that 00h is not set as the barrier operation focus drive energizing time, the barrier operation focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set as the focus energizing time (S5724). And S5736
Move to

If it is determined that 00h is set as the focus drive energizing time for barrier operation, the flow shifts to S5726, where a power on / off temperature measurement process (FIG. 1) is performed.
It is determined whether the temperature (TEMP) measured in S112 of S9 is equal to or higher than the high temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPH). If it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or higher than the high-temperature set temperature, the high-temperature focus drive energization time data (ETLD2MONH) is set as the focus energization time (S5).
730).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5726 that the measured temperature is not higher than the high temperature set temperature, the measured temperature (TE
MP) is equal to or lower than the low temperature set temperature (ELD2TEMPL) (S5728). When it is determined that the measured temperature is equal to or lower than the low-temperature set temperature, the low-temperature focus drive energization time data (ET LD2MON
L) is set (S5734). On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured temperature is not lower than the low temperature set temperature, the room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set as the focus energizing time (S5732).

[0825] In the high-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONH), a time shorter than the room-temperature focus drive energizing time data (E_T_LD2MONM) is set. Also, focus drive energizing time data at room temperature (ET
LD2MONM) is the focus drive energizing time data (E
(T LD2MONL) is set.

[0826] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5736, where a value obtained by doubling the focus drive brake time data (E_T_LD2BRAKE) is set as the focus brake time. Then, the flow shifts to S5738, where 0 is set as focus count 0. Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S5740), 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S5742), 0 is set as the focus count pulse (S5744), and 0 is set as the focus count HP (S574).
6), 0 is set as the focus count SUM (S5748).

[0827] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5750 in FIG. 115,
0 is set as the focus count 0. Then, 0 is set as the focus count HP (S5752).

[0827] The focus initial movement pitch count data (DP IN) is used as the focus count SUM.
I) focus drive backlash count data (E
P FCGB) is set. Then, as the focus count 1, a value obtained by doubling the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) and adding 20 pitches and subtracting the result from the focus count SUM is set (S5756).

[0829] Subsequently, it is determined whether the focus count 1 is 0 or less (S5758). When it is determined that the focus count 1 is not less than or equal to 0, the focus count 2 is obtained by subtracting the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N2) from twice the focus drive first speed count data (EP LD2N1). Is set (S5760).

[0832] Then, the focus drive second speed count data (EP LD2N
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S576).
2). Then, a value obtained by subtracting twice the focus drive first speed count data (E_P_LD2N1) from the focus count SUM and dividing by 2 is set as the focus count 1 (S5764).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a remainder (S
5766) When it is determined that there is a remainder, the value obtained by adding the remainder to the focus count 2 is set as the focus count 2 (S5768), and the flow shifts to S5770. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no remainder, S
The flow shifts to 5770, where focus count 1 is set as the event count. Then, S5 in FIG.
It moves to 788.

[0832] If it is determined in S5758 that the focus count 1 is equal to or less than 0, the focus count 2 is used as the focus count 2 and the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N2).
Is set (S5772). And
It is determined whether or not the focus count 2 is 0 or less (S5774). If it is determined that the focus count 2 is not 0 or less, the focus drive second speed count data (E_P_LD2N) is used as the focus count pulse.
The value obtained by subtracting the focus drive brake pitch count data (EP FCBRK) from 2) is set (S577).
6). Then, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S5778), and the flow shifts to S5788 in FIG.

[0832] If it is determined in S5774 that the focus count 2 is equal to or smaller than 0, the focus count SUM is used as the focus count pulse.
From the focus drive brake pitch count data (E
(P FCBRK) is set (S578).
0).

[0834] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5782, where it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is equal to or less than 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is not less than 0, 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S5784). . Then, 0 is set as the focus count 2 (S5786), and S5788 in FIG. 116 is set.
Move to On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is equal to or smaller than 0, the flow shifts to S5822 in FIG.

[0835] In S5788 of FIG. 116, the terminal LPII
N is read. And the terminal LPIIN is L
Is determined (S5790). Terminal LPI
When it is determined that IN is L, the terminal LPIIN
Are reset (S5792). On the other hand, when it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is not L,
The HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set (S57)
94).

[0836] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5796, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is H,
The output of No. 2 is set to H, and the normal rotation drive is performed (S579).
8).

[0837] Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S5800). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the 0th speed control H start drive processing operation is performed. Is performed (S5802). On the other hand, when it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is not set, the 0th speed control L start drive processing is performed (S5804). 0th
The details of the speed control H start drive processing and the zeroth speed control L start drive processing will be described later.

[0838] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5806, where LPIIN
It is determined whether the overtime is set or not,
If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S5818. On the other hand, LPII
If it is determined that the N overtime has not been set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, the output of DC1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S5808). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S5810).

[0839] Then, it is determined whether the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set or not (S5812). If it is determined that the HL flag of the terminal LPIIN is set, the pitch count measurement during braking H start drive is performed. The processing is performed (S5814). On the other hand, terminal LPI
If it is determined that the IN HL flag has not been set, then a braking pitch count measurement L start drive process is performed (S5816). The details of the brake pitch count measurement H start drive processing and the brake pitch count measurement L start drive processing will be described later.

[0840] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S5818, where the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. And L
It is determined whether the PIIN overtime has been set (S5820). If it is determined that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S5822.

At S5822, an initial (INI) error is set. Then, control goes to a step S5824. on the other hand,
If it is determined in S5820 that the LPIIN overtime has been set, the flow shifts to S5824. In S5824, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L,
When the output of DC1 is L and the output of DC2 is L
Is set to a standby state. Then, the terminal LHPIN is set to the output port (S5826) and waits for 2 ms (S58).
After 28), the focus power is reset (S58).
30).

[0832] Then, the driver ON / OFF terminal CE is set to L, the driver unit 219 is set in a state where it does not operate (S5832), the operation mode of the CPU 200 is set to the medium speed mode (S5834), and the focus error EEPR is set.
An OM writing process is performed (S5836). The focus error EEPROM writing process is a process of writing a focus error into the EEPROM 218 after focus driving. By performing this processing, it is possible to easily confirm that an error has occurred by the focus driving, and the camera 2 can be easily repaired.

[0843] After the focus error EEPROM writing process, the focus initial movement process ends.

[0844] As described above, according to the focus initializing process, the second lens group 102 according to the input of the terminal LHPIN.
The (focus) position can be detected, and the barrier closing process can be appropriately performed according to the position. At this time, the terminal L
When the input of the HPIN is L, it is possible to detect which side the HP is located by performing an initial movement (focus initial movement processing). For this reason, the second lens group 10
Even if there is no sensor for directly detecting No. 2, proper barrier closing processing can be performed.

[0845] Also, according to the focus initializing process, FIG.
As shown at 09 and 110, the second lens group 102 (focus) is moved from the TELE standby position side to the stopper side (FIG. 10).
9, the second speed control having a lower moving speed than the first speed control is used without performing the first speed control. As a result, H at the terminal LHPIN
P can be accurately detected, and the position of the second lens group 102 can be accurately detected. Therefore, the accuracy in the subsequent focusing can be improved.

Next, focus error recovery processing (F
OCUS error recovery processing) will be described.

FIGS. 117 to 119 show operation explanatory diagrams in the focus error recovery processing. FIG. 120 shows a flowchart of the focus error recovery processing.

The focus error recovery process is a process for recovering the state where the gears 141 and 143 (see FIG. 10) do not mesh well, for example, when the second lens group 102 is moved to the WIDE standby position.

[0849] The focus error recovery process is the same as that shown in FIG.
First, as shown in S6000 of 0, an encoder check process is performed. Then, it is determined whether the terminals EA and EB are 1 (S6002). When it is determined that the terminals EA and EB are not 1, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that both the terminals EA and EB are 1, Z2 is set as the lens barrel stop position (S600).
4).

[0850] Then, zoom TELE drive is performed, and the lens barrel 1 is extended from Z1 to Z2. Then, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection overtime is reached (S6008). If it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has been reached, the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, it is determined whether or not the PI overtime has been reached (S6010).

[0851] If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, the focus initial movement process is performed (S6012). As shown in FIG. 118, the focus initial movement process is performed in the second lens group 1
02 (Focus) TEL according to constant pulse data
This is the process of E-drive. As a result of this focus initial movement processing, one of the two gears to be meshed rotates with the movement of the second lens group 102.

[0852] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S6014 in FIG. 120,
Close processing is performed. The closing process is a process of moving the lens barrel 1 to Z1 as described above (see FIGS. 35 and 36). Then, it is determined whether or not the encoder detection overtime is reached (S6016).
If it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has been reached, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the encoder detection overtime has not been reached, P
It is determined whether or not the I time is over (S
6018).

[0853] If it is determined that the PI is overtime, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI overtime has not been reached, focus initial HP processing is performed (S6020). The focus initial HP process is a focus initial process in which the focus initial movement process is not performed. The focus is initialized by the focus initial HP process, and the barrier 83 is closed.

[0854] Then, the main switch state (SM state)
It is determined whether or not a closed code is set as (S6022). When it is determined that the close code has not been set as the main switch state, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closed code is set as the main switch state, E0 is set as the encoder position (S6024), Z0 is set as the lens barrel position (S6026), and the lens barrel error is reset (S6026). S6028). Then, the process ends.

As described above, according to the focus error recovery processing, when the lens barrel 1 is retracted, the gear 14
If 1,143 (see FIG. 10) do not mesh well,
The lens barrel 1 is extended as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, the second lens group 1 is driven by driving the motor 95.
02 after moving the gear 141 by rotating the gear 141 in FIG.
When the lens barrel 1 is retracted as shown in (1), the gears 141 and 143 can be re-engaged.
Thereby, when the gears 141 and 143 do not mesh well, the operation failure can be recovered without processing as an error, and the camera failure can be reduced.

Next, focus drive processing will be described.

[0857] Fig. 121 shows the relationship between the type of drive control and the speed in the focus drive processing. FIGS. 122 to 131 show flowcharts of the focus drive processing.

[0858] The focus drive process is a process of driving the motor 95 to move the second lens group 102. The 0th speed control L start drive process, the 0th speed control H start drive process,
First speed control L start drive process, first speed control H start drive process, second speed control L start drive process, second speed control H start drive process, pulse drive control L start drive process, pulse drive control H start drive Processing, pulse detection control without HP detection L
A start drive process and a pulse drive control without HP detection H start drive process are performed.

In the 0th speed control L start drive processing of the focus drive processing, first, as shown in S6500 in FIG. 122, the HP detection is reset. Then, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count 0 (S6502). If it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 0, the process shifts to the first speed control L start drive processing of FIG. 124. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 0, the focus count 0 is set as the focus count (S6504). The focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E
TLD2LLN2) is set (S6510).

[0860] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S6512, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at H or not (S
6514). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S6).
515).

[0861] It is determined whether 0 is set as the focus count or not (S6516). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count, the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime or not (S
6518). If it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminals DC0, DC
It is determined whether DC1, DC2 is in the energized state (S6520), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2
Is determined to be in the energized state, S65
Move to 26. On the other hand, parallel terminals DC0, DC1,
When it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of the DC1 is L, the output of the DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6522).

[0863] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
C2 is set to the energized state (S6524). Then, the flow shifts to S6526, where the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the flow shifts to S6564 in FIG. 123.

[0864] On the other hand, when it is determined in S6518 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime,
It is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state (S6528). If it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the flow shifts to S6534. On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. (S6530).

[0866] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S6532). Then, the flow shifts to S6534, where the focus drive second speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN2) is set as the PI measurement timer, and FIG.
Then, the flow shifts to S6564 in S23.

[0866] By the way, in S6514, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S6536, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection is set (S6538), and when it is determined that the HP detection is set, FIG.
To the first speed control L start drive process.

If it is determined that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S6542). LP
When it is determined that the IIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6544), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6546).

If it is determined in S6546 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S65.
Return to 14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6548). When it is determined that the state is not the brake output state, the process returns to S6514.

[0832] On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S6550).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S655)
1). Then, the flow returns to S6514.

FIG. 123 shows a flowchart of the 0th speed control H start drive processing operation.

In the 0th speed control H start drive processing, first, as shown in S6552 in FIG. 123, HP detection is reset. Then, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count 1 (S6554). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 1, the process shifts to the first speed control H start drive process in FIG. 125. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 1, the focus count 0 is set as the focus count (S6).
556). Then, the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6562).

[0873] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S6564, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S
6566). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S6).
567).

[0873] Subsequently, it is determined whether 0 is set as the focus count or not (S6568). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count, the flow shifts to S6512 in FIG.

[0874] By the way, in S6566, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not L, then the flow shifts to S6570, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection is set (S6572), and when it is determined that the HP detection is set, FIG.
To the first speed control H start drive process.

[0887] On the other hand, when it is determined that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S6576). LP
If it is determined that the IIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6578), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6580).

If it is determined in S6580 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S6580.
Return to 66. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is H, the output of DC1 is H, the output of DC2 is H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6582). When it is determined that the state is not the brake output state, the process returns to S6566.

[0877] On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S6584).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S658)
6). Then, the process returns to S6566.

FIG. 124 shows a flowchart of the first speed control L start drive processing operation.

In the first speed control L start drive processing, it is first determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count 1 as shown in S6602 of FIG. 124 (S6).
602) If it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 1, then the flow shifts to the second speed control L start drive process in FIG. 126. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 1, rising is set as the event counter mode (S6604).

[0880] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S66).
06), when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN1) is set (S6608). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized, the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6610).

[0891] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S6612, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at H or not (S
6614). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the event count (S6616). When it is determined that 0 has been set as the event count, the flow shifts to the second speed control H start drive process in FIG. 127.

If it is determined that 0 is not set as the event count, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime or not (S6).
618). If it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminals DC0, DC
It is determined whether DC1 and DC2 are in the energized state (S6620), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are determined.
Is determined to be in the energized state, S66
Move to 26. On the other hand, parallel terminals DC0, DC1,
When it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of the DC1 is L, the output of the DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6622).

[0883] The parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
C2 is set to the energized state (S6624). Then, the flow shifts to S6626, where the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the flow shifts to S6664 in FIG. 125.

[0884] On the other hand, if it is determined in S6618 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime,
It is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2 are energized (S6628), and if it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2 are not energized, the flow shifts to S6634. On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. (S6630).

[0885] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S6632). Then, the flow shifts to S6634, where the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN1) is set as the PI measurement timer, and FIG.
The flow shifts to S6664 in 25.

[0886] By the way, in S6614, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, then the flow shifts to S6636, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether the HP detection is set (S6638), and if it is determined that the HP detection is set, it is determined whether the focus count HP is 0 (S6639). When it is determined that the focus count HP is 0, the flow shifts to S6642. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count HP has not become 0, the focus count HP is set as a focus count pulse (S6640). Then, the flow shifts to pulse start control L start drive processing without HP detection in FIG. 130.

[0887] On the other hand, when it is determined in S6638 that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S6638).
6642). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6644), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6646).

[0888] If it is determined in S6646 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S6646.
Return to 14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6648). When it is determined that the state is not the brake output state, the process returns to S6614.

[0889] On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6650).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S665)
1). Then, the process returns to S6614.

FIG. 125 shows a flowchart of the first speed control H start drive processing operation.

In the first speed control H start drive processing operation, first, it is determined whether or not the focus count 1 has become 0 (S6654). If it is determined that the focus count 1 has become 0, the process shown in FIG. To the second speed control H start drive process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count 1 is not 0, the rising is set as the event counter mode (S665).
6).

[1045] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S66).
58), when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the focus drive first speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN1) is set (S6660). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized, the focus drive first speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN1) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6662).

[0896] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S6664, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S
6666). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the event count (S6668). When it is determined that 0 has been set as the event count, the flow shifts to the second speed control H start drive processing operation in FIG. 126. On the other hand, if it is determined that 0 has not been set as the event count, the flow shifts to S6612 in FIG.

[0894] By the way, in S6666, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not L, then the flow shifts to S6670, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection is set (S6672). When it is determined that the HP detection is set, it is determined whether or not the focus count HP is 0 (S66).
73). When it is determined that the focus count HP is 0, the flow shifts to S6676. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count HP is not 0, the focus count HP is set as a focus count pulse (S6674). Then, the flow shifts to pulse drive control H start drive processing without HP detection in FIG. 131.

[0895] On the other hand, when it is determined that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S6676). LP
If it is determined that the IIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6678), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6680).

If it is determined in S6680 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S6680.
Return to 66. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6682). When it is determined that the brake output state has not been established, the process returns to S6666.

[0897] On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S6684).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S668)
6). Then, the process returns to S6666.

FIG. 126 shows a flowchart of the second speed control L start drive processing operation.

[0899] The second speed control L start drive processing operation is the same as that in FIG.
As shown in S6688, it is determined whether 0 is set as the focus count 2 or not. When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 2, the flow shifts to pulse drive control L start drive processing in FIG. 128. On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count 2, the focus count 2 is set as the focus count (S6).
690).

[1010] The parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S66).
92) When it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the focus driving second speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN2) is set (S6694). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6696).

[1095] Then, 200 ms is set as the LPIIN overtime (S6698), and the terminal LPII
It is determined whether or not N is H (S6700). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S6702), and it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count (S6704). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count, the flow shifts to pulse drive control H start drive processing in FIG. 129.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S
6706). If it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminals DC0, DC
It is determined whether DC1 and DC2 are energized (S6716), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are determined.
Is determined to be in the energized state, S67
Move to 22. On the other hand, parallel terminals DC0, DC1,
If it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of the DC1 is L, the output of the DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6718).

[1045] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
C2 is set to the energized state (S6720). Then, the flow shifts to S6722, where the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the flow shifts to S6752 in FIG. 127.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6706 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime,
It is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized (S6708). If it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the flow shifts to S6714. On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. (S6710).

[0905] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S6712). Then, the flow shifts to S6714, where the focus drive second speed upper limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LUN2) is set as the PI measurement timer, and FIG.
The process moves to S6752 of S27.

[0906] By the way, in S6700, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S6724, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection is set (S6726). When it is determined that the HP detection is set, it is determined whether or not the focus count HP is 0 (S67).
27). If it is determined that the focus count HP is 0, the flow shifts to S6730. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count HP is not 0, the focus count HP is set as a focus count pulse (S6728). Then, the flow shifts to pulse start control L start drive processing without HP detection in FIG. 130.

If it is determined that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S6730). LP
If it is determined that the IIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6732), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6734).

If it is determined in S6734 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S6734.
Return to 00. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
, The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6736). When it is determined that the brake output state has not been established, the process returns to S6700.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is set, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6738).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S674)
0). Then, the process returns to S6700.

FIG. 127 shows a flowchart of the second speed control H start drive processing operation.

[0911] The second speed control H start drive processing operation is the same as that in FIG.
First, as shown in S6742, it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count 2. When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count 2, the flow shifts to pulse drive control H start drive processing in FIG. 129. On the other hand, the focus count 2 is 0
When it is determined that is not set, focus count 2 is set as the focus count (S6744).

[0912] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S67).
46), when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the focus drive second speed upper limit pulse time (ET
LD2LUN2) is set (S6748). On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive second speed lower limit pulse time (E_T_LD2LLN2) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6750).

[0913] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S6752, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S
6754). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S67).
56) It is determined whether 0 is set as the focus count (S6758). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count, the flow shifts to pulse drive control L start drive processing in FIG. 128. On the other hand, if it is determined that 0 has not been set as the focus count, the flow shifts to S6698 in FIG. 126.

[0914] By the way, in S6754, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not L, the flow shifts to S6760, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection is set (S6762). When it is determined that the HP detection is set, it is determined whether or not the focus count HP is 0 (S6763). If it is determined that the focus count HP is 0, the flow shifts to S6766. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count HP has not become 0, the focus count HP is set as a focus count pulse (S6764). Then, the flow shifts to pulse drive control H start drive processing without HP detection in FIG. 131.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6762 that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime (S106).
6766). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6768), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6770).

If it is determined in S6770 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S6770.
Return to 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6772). When it is determined that the state is not the brake output state, the flow returns to S6754.

[0991] On the other hand, when it is determined that the brake output state is established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to L, D
The output of C1 is set to L, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the motor 95 is set in a standby state (S6774).
DC1 and DC2 are set to the energized state (S677)
6). Then, the flow returns to S6754.

FIG. 128 shows a flowchart of the pulse drive control L start drive processing operation.

[0919] The pulse drive control L start drive processing is performed as shown in FIG.
As shown in S6777 of FIG. 8, it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is 0,
The HL flag of LHPIN is reset (S677)
9). Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse is not 0,
A focus count pulse is set as a focus count (S6778).

[0920] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S67).
80) When it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6782). On the other hand, the parallel terminal DC
When it is determined that 0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6784).

[0921] Then, 200 ms is set as the LPIIN overtime (S6786), and the terminal LPII
It is determined whether or not N is H (S6788). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S6790), and it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count (S6792). 0 as focus count
Is determined to be set, LPIIN
Is set (S6794), and the process ends.

[0922] On the other hand, when it is determined that 0 is not set as the focus count, the parallel terminal D
It is determined whether or not C0, DC1, and DC2 are in an energized state (S6796), and the parallel terminals DC0 and DC2 are determined.
1. When it is determined that the DC2 is not in the energized state, the flow shifts to S6802. On the other hand, the parallel terminal DC
When it is determined that 0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6798). .

[0923] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S6800). Then, the flow shifts to S6802, where the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer.
Move to 38.

[0924] By the way, in S6788, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S6804, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection is set (S6806). When it is determined that the HP detection is set, it is determined whether or not the focus count HP is 0 (S6807). If it is determined that the focus count HP is 0, the flow shifts to S6810. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count HP has not become 0, the focus count HP is set as a focus count pulse (S6808). Then, the flow shifts to pulse start control L start drive processing without HP detection in FIG. 130.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6806 that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S6806).
6810). If it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6812), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6814).

If it is determined in S6814 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the flow proceeds to S6714.
Return to 88. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6816).

[0927] If it is determined in S6816 that the brake output state has not been established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state ( S6818). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the brake output state is set (S6822), and the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S682).
2). Then, the process returns to S6788.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6816 that the brake output state has been established, the parallel terminal DC
The output of 0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6824), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are set to an energized state (S6826). And as a PI measurement timer,
The focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set (S6828). Then, the process returns to S6788.

FIG. 129 shows a flowchart of the barrier pulse drive control H start drive processing operation.

[0930] The barrier pulse drive control H start drive processing is as follows.
As shown in S6829 of FIG. 129, it is determined whether or not the focus count pulse is 0. When it is determined that the focus count pulse is 0, the HL flag of LHPIN is reset (S
6831). Then, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count pulse has not become 0, the flow shifts to S6830, where the focus count pulse is set as the focus count.

[0931] Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, D
It is determined whether C2 is in the energized state (S68).
32) If it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6834). On the other hand, the parallel terminal DC
When it is determined that 0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6836).

[0932] Subsequently, the flow shifts to S6838, where LPIIN
200 ms is set as the overtime. Then, it is determined whether the terminal LPIIN is at L or not (S
6840). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S
6842), and it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count (S6844). When it is determined that 0 is set as the focus count, the HL flag of LPIIN is reset (S6).
846), and the process ends.

[0932] On the other hand, when it is determined in S6844 that 0 is not set as the focus count, it is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized (S6848), and the parallel terminal DC0 is determined. , DC1 and DC2 are determined not to be in the energized state, the flow shifts to S6854. on the other hand,
When it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state ( S6850).

[0934] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S6582). Then, the flow shifts to S6854, where the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer.
Go to 86.

[0935] By the way, in S6840, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not L, then the flow shifts to S6856, where an HP detection process is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the HP detection is set (S6858). When it is determined that the HP detection is set, it is determined whether or not the focus count HP is 0 (S6859). When it is determined that the focus count HP is 0, the flow shifts to S6862. On the other hand, when it is determined that the focus count HP has not become 0, the focus count HP is set as a focus count pulse (S6860). Then, the flow shifts to pulse drive control H start drive processing without HP detection in FIG. 131.

[0932] On the other hand, when it is determined in S6858 that the HP detection is not set, it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime or not (S6858).
6862). When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6864), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S6866).

If it is determined in S6866 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, the process proceeds to S6886.
Return to 40. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6868).

[0938] If it is determined in S6868 that the brake output state has not been established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state ( S6870). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the brake output state is set (S6872), and the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S687).
4). Then, the process returns to S6840.

[0939] On the other hand, when it is determined in S6868 that the brake output state is established, the parallel terminal DC
The output of 0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6876), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are set to an energized state (S6878). And as a PI measurement timer,
The focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set (S6880). Then, the process returns to S6840.

FIG. 130 shows pulse drive control L without HP detection.
4 shows a flowchart of a start driving process.

[0941] In the pulse drive control L start drive processing without HP detection, as shown in S6890 in Fig. 130, first, a focus count pulse is set as a focus count. Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC
It is determined whether or not No. 2 is in the energized state (S689)
2) When it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6894). On the other hand, the parallel terminal DC
When it is determined that 0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6896).

[0942] Then, 200 ms is set as the LPIIN overtime (S6898), and the terminal LPII
It is determined whether or not N is H (S6900). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at H, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S6902), and it is determined whether or not 0 is set as the focus count (S6904). 0 as focus count
Is determined to be set, LPIIN
Is set (S6905), and the process ends.

[0931] On the other hand, if it is determined in S6904 that the focus count is not set to 0, it is determined whether the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized (S6908). When it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the flow shifts to S6914. On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. (S691
0).

[0944] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S6912). Then, the flow shifts to S6914, where the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the control flow goes to S69 in FIG. 131.
Go to 53.

[0945] By the way, in S6900, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S6930, where it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime. When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6932), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S693).
4).

[0946] If it is determined in S6934 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, then in S6934
Return to 00. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6936).

[0947] If it is determined in S6936 that the brake output state is not established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state ( S6938). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the brake output state is set (S6940), and the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S694).
2). Then, the process returns to S6900.

[0948] On the other hand, when it is determined in S6936 that the brake output state has been established, the parallel terminal DC
The output of 0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6944), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC2 are set to the energized state (S6946). And as a PI measurement timer,
The focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set (S6948). Then, the process returns to S6900.

FIG. 131 shows pulse drive control H without HP detection.
4 shows a flowchart of a start driving process.

[0950] In the pulse drive control H start drive processing without HP detection, as shown in S6949 of Fig. 131, first, a focus count pulse is set as a focus count. Then, the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, DC
It is determined whether or not 2 is in the energized state (S695)
0), when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not energized, the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as a PI measurement timer (S6951). On the other hand, the parallel terminal DC
When it is determined that 0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set as the PI measurement timer (S6952).

[1045] Then, 200 ms is set as the LPIIN overtime (S6953), and the terminal LPII
It is determined whether N is L (S6954). When it is determined that the terminal LPIIN is at L, the focus count is reduced by 1 (S6956), and it is determined whether 0 is set as the focus count (S6958). 0 as focus count
Is determined to be set, LPIIN
Is set (S6959), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S6958 that 0 is not set as the focus count, it is determined whether or not the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are energized (S6960). When it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are not in the energized state, the flow shifts to S6966. On the other hand, when it is determined that the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are in the energized state, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state. (S696
2).

[0953] The output of the parallel terminal DC0 is H,
The output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and a brake output state is set (S6964). Then, the flow shifts to S6966, where the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer, and the process goes to S68 in FIG. 130.
Move to 98.

[0954] By the way, in S6954, the terminal LPII
If it is determined that N is not H, the flow shifts to S6968, where it is determined whether the LPIIN timer is overtime. When it is determined that the LPIIN timer is overtime, the LPIIN overtime is set (S6970), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LPIIN timer is not overtime, it is determined whether the PI measurement timer is overtime (S697).
2).

[0995] If it is determined in S6972 that the PI measurement timer is not overtime, then in S6972
Return to 54. On the other hand, when it is determined that the PI measurement timer is overtime, the parallel terminal DC0
Is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, and the output of DC2 is set to H, and it is determined whether or not the brake is in the output state (S6994).

If it is determined in S6974 that the brake output state is not established, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, and the motor 95 is in a standby state ( S6976). Then, the output of the parallel terminal DC0 is set to H, the output of DC1 is set to H, the output of DC2 is set to H, and the brake output state is set (S6978), and the focus brake time (ET BARIBRAKE) is set as the PI measurement timer (S698).
0). Then, the flow returns to S6954.

[0957] On the other hand, when it is determined in S6974 that the brake is in the output state, the parallel terminal DC
The output of 0 is L, the output of DC1 is L, the output of DC2 is H, the motor 95 is in a standby state (S6982), and the parallel terminals DC0, DC1, and DC2 are set to an energized state (S6984). And as a PI measurement timer,
The focus drive energizing time (ET BARIMON) is set (S6986). Then, the flow returns to S6954.

Next, the HP detection processing will be described.

FIG. 132 shows a flowchart of the HP detection processing. As shown in S7000 of FIG. 132, in the HP detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the HP detection flag is set. Then, when it is determined that the HP detection flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the HP detection flag is not set, it is determined whether there is a change in the terminal LHPIN (S7002).

[1060] Then, in S7002, the terminal LHPIN
If it is determined that there is no change, the process ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a change in the terminal LHPIN, after waiting for 50 μs (S7004), it is determined whether the falling flag of the HP is set (S7004).
7006).

[0961] If it is determined in S7006 that the HP falling flag has been set, then
It is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L (S70).
08). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at L, then the flow shifts to S7010. On the other hand, when the terminal LHPIN is L
If it is determined that it is not, the process ends.

If it is determined in S7006 that the HP falling flag is not set, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at H or not (S7006).
7008). If it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is at H, then the flow shifts to S7010. On the other hand, the terminal LHPIN
Is not H, the process ends.

[0964] Then, in S7010, the HP detection flag is set. Then, the HP detection processing ends.

[0964] Next, the brake pitch count measurement drive processing will be described.

FIG. 133 shows a flowchart of the braking pitch count measurement drive processing. The braking pitch count measurement driving process includes a braking pitch count measurement L start driving process and a braking pitch count measurement H start driving process.

[0966] As shown in S7100 of Fig. 133, during the braking pitch count measurement L start drive processing, first, L
15 ms is set as the PIIN overtime. Then, the number of overpitches (C
FCOV) is set to 0 (S7102).

[0967] Then, it is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at H or not (S7104). When it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not H, it is determined whether or not the LHPIN is overtime (S7106). LHP
If it is determined that the IN overtime has not been reached, the process returns to S7104. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LHPIN is overtime, the LHPIN
The L flag is reset (S7108), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S7104 that the terminal LHPIN is at H, 1 is added to the number of over-pitches at the time of focus driving (S7110). And
It is determined whether the terminal LHPIN is at L (S71).
16). When it is determined that the terminal LHPIN is not L, it is determined whether or not the LHPIN is overtime (S7120). When it is determined that the LHPIN overtime has not been reached, the process returns to S7116. On the other hand, when it is determined that the LHPIN is overtime, the HL flag of the LHPIN is set (S7122), and the process ends.

[0969] On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7116 that the terminal LHPIN is at L, then 1 is added to the overpitch number during focus driving (S7118). And
It returns to S7104.

As described above, according to the lens barrel 1 of the present embodiment, all of the lens groups are housed in the third cylinder 6, so that the optical axis and posture of each lens group can be accurately maintained. It becomes easier. Further, by moving the second lens group 102, which is a movable lens group, by a motor 95 built in the third cylinder 6, which is the earliest cylinder, even if an external force is applied to the lens barrel, the lens group between the lens groups can be moved. The second lens group 102 can be moved without changing its posture, and desired optical performance can be secured. Further, zooming is possible by extending and retracting the third cylinder 6, so that fine cam correction movement between lens groups is not required, and accurate zooming can be performed.

[0971] Further, by simply extending or retracting the third barrel 6 to which each lens group is attached, and moving the second lens group 102, it is possible to change the magnification and focus of the lens optical system composed of each lens group. is there. For this reason, there is no need to drive a specific lens group by performing cam linkage with a cylinder other than the third cylinder 6 to which each lens group is attached for zooming and focus adjustment. Is unnecessary. Therefore, the size of the lens barrel can be reduced.

[0972] The first lens group 101 and the third lens group 103, which are two fixed lens groups, and the second lens group 102 which is a movable lens group are accommodated in the third cylinder 6, and the second lens group 102 For the first lens group 101 and the third lens group 1
By arranging the second lens group between the first lens group 101 and the third lens group 103, the sliding portion and the moving mechanism related to the movement of the second lens group 102 can be shielded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from adhering to the sliding portion and the moving mechanism, and to surely prevent the fine focusing drive from being hindered.

[0973] In the above-described embodiment, the case where the lens driving device according to the present invention is applied to the APS camera has been described. However, the lens driving device according to the present invention is not limited to such. And other optical devices.

[0974]

As described above, according to the present invention, one end of the moving body is detected by making the moving body moving together with the movable lens group have a certain width and detecting the passage at both ends. The moving position of the movable lens group when passing through the detection position and when the other end passes can be detected. For this reason, two positions of the movable lens group can be detected by one detecting means and one moving body, and the number of detecting means and moving bodies can be reduced. Therefore, the size and cost of the lens driving device can be reduced. Further, the size and cost of the lens barrel can be reduced.

Also, by detecting the position of the movable lens group at two locations, it is possible to set the reference position of the movable lens group at two locations accurately. By setting two standby positions of the movable lens group based on the extended state of the lens barrel with reference to these two reference positions, the amount of movement of the movable lens group during focusing can be reduced. . As a result, a movement error is reduced, and accurate focusing can be performed. Further, time parallax at the time of shooting can be reduced.

[Brief description of the drawings]

FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a camera provided with a lens driving device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a camera including a lens driving device according to an embodiment of the present invention.

FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a lens barrel in the camera of FIG.

4 is an exploded perspective view of a lens barrel in the camera of FIG.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a lens barrel in the camera of FIG.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a lens driving device according to the embodiment.

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating detection of a second lens group in the lens driving device according to the embodiment.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating detection of a second lens group in the lens driving device according to the embodiment.

9 is a cross-sectional view of a third barrel in the lens barrel of the camera in FIG.

FIG. 10 is a sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 9;

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a basic operation of a lens barrel of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a basic operation of a lens barrel of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a basic operation of a lens barrel of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a basic operation of a lens barrel of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a basic operation of a lens barrel of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an electrical configuration of the camera shown in FIG. 1;

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of a branching process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 18 is a flowchart of an initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 19 is a flowchart of an initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 20 is a flowchart of an initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 21 is a flowchart of a release process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a release process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a release process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a release process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 25 is a flowchart of a release process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 26 is a flowchart of a main switch process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 27 is a flowchart of SM opening processing of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 28 is a flowchart of SM close processing of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a standby process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 30 is a flowchart of an automatic WIDE process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a lens barrel recovery check process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of control signals of a lens barrel driving motor and a second lens group driving motor in the camera of FIG. 1;

FIG. 33 is a schematic explanatory view of the operation of the lens barrel of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 34 is a flowchart of an open process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 35 is a flowchart of a closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 37 is a timing chart of driving stop during WIDE driving of the lens barrel of the camera of FIG. 1;

FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a zoom TELE process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a zoom TELE process of the camera in FIG. 1;

40 is a timing chart of driving stop during TELE driving of the lens barrel of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 41 is a flowchart of a zoom WIDE process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a zoom WIDE process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 43 is a flowchart of a zoom offset process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a TELE drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a TELE drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a WIDE drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a WIDE drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a lens barrel recovery process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 49 is an operation schematic diagram of a lens barrel recovery process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 50 is a flowchart of a lens barrel recovery driving process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a lens barrel recovery driving process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 52 is a flowchart of a mode PI count process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 53 is a flowchart of a lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 55 is an operation schematic diagram of a first lens drive process and a first lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 56 is a flowchart of a first lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a first lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 58 is a flowchart of a first lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a first lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a first lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 61 is an operation schematic diagram of a second lens drive process and a second lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the second lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the second lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 64 is a flowchart of a second lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a second lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 66 is a flowchart of a second lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 67 is a flowchart of a second lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a second lens drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the second lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

70 is an operation explanatory diagram of the second lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of a second lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 72 is a flowchart of a second lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a second lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 74 is a flowchart of a second lens return process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a second lens return process of the camera of FIG. 1;

76 shows a WID in the barrier closing process of the camera shown in FIG. 1.
It is operation | movement explanatory drawing at the time of E standby.

FIG. 77 shows TEL in barrier closing processing of the camera in FIG. 1
It is operation | movement explanatory drawing at the time of E standby.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart of a barrier closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 79 is a flowchart of a barrier closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 80 is a flowchart of a barrier closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 81 is a flowchart of a barrier closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a barrier closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a barrier closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 84 is a flowchart of a barrier closing process of the camera in FIG. 1;

85 is a flowchart of a focus driving process for barrier closing operation of the camera in FIG. 1;

86 is a flowchart of a focus drive process for barrier closing operation of the camera in FIG. 1;

87 is a flowchart of a focus drive process for barrier closing operation of the camera in FIG. 1.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart of focus drive processing for barrier closing operation of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 89 is a flowchart of focus drive processing for barrier closing operation of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 90 is a flowchart of a focus drive process for barrier closing operation of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram of the operation in the barrier opening process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 92 is a flowchart of a barrier opening process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a barrier opening process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 94 is a flowchart of a barrier opening process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 95 is a flowchart of a barrier opening process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 96 is a flowchart of a barrier opening process of the camera in FIG. 1;

97 is an explanatory diagram of an operation in a focus TELE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 98 is a flowchart of focus TELE standby movement processing of the camera in FIG. 1;

99 is a flowchart of a focus TELE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

100 is a flowchart of a focus TELE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

101 is a flowchart of focus TELE standby movement processing of the camera in FIG. 1;

102 is a flowchart of a focus TELE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

103 is an explanatory diagram of an operation in a focus WIDE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

104 is a flowchart of a focus WIDE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 105 is a flowchart of a focus WIDE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

106 is a flowchart of a focus WIDE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

107 is a flowchart of a focus WIDE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

108 is a flowchart of a focus WIDE standby movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

109 is an explanatory diagram of an operation in a focus initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

110 is an explanatory diagram of an operation in a focus initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 111 is a flowchart of a focus initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

112 is a flowchart of a focus initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

113 is a flowchart of a focus initial process of the camera in FIG. 1;

114 is a flowchart of a focus initial movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

115 is a flowchart of a focus initial movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 116 is a flowchart of a focus initial movement process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram of the operation in the focus error recovery process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram of the operation in the focus error recovery process of the camera in FIG. 1;

119 is an explanatory diagram of an operation in a focus error recovery process of the camera in FIG. 1;

120 is a flowchart of a focus error recovery process of the camera in FIG.

FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a type of drive control and a speed in a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 122 is a flowchart of focus drive processing of the camera in FIG. 1;

123 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

124 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 125 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

126 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 127 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 128 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 129 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 130 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 131 is a flowchart of a focus drive process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 132 is a flowchart of an HP detection process of the camera in FIG. 1;

FIG. 133 is a flowchart of a pitch count measurement drive process during braking of the camera in FIG. 1;

[Explanation of symbols]

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Lens barrel, 2 ... Camera, 3 ... Camera main body, 4 ... First cylinder, 5 ... Second cylinder, 6 ... Third cylinder, 101 ... First lens group, 102 ... Second lens group 102, 103 ... Third lens group, O: optical axis.

──────────────────────────────────────────────────続 き Continued on the front page (51) Int.Cl. ⁷ Identification symbol FI Theme coat ゛ (Reference) G02B 7/10 G03B 5/00 E G03B 5/00 17/04 17/04 G02B 7/04 A (72) Inventor Fumio Iwai 1-324 Uetake-cho, Saitama-shi, Saitama, Japan Fuji Photo Optical Co., Ltd. (72) Inventor Noboru Shimada 1-324 Uetake-cho, Saitama-shi, Saitama F-term in Fuji Photo Optical Co., Ltd. (Reference) 2H044 BA07 BF02 DA01 DA02 DB02 DC01 EC01 2H101 BB05 BB07 BB08 DD22 DD51 DD52 DD53 DD58 DD62 DD63 DD65

Claims (3)

[Claims] 1. A lens optical system in which a plurality of lens groups are arranged along an optical axis, and at least one of the plurality of lens groups is a movable lens group; A lens driving device, comprising: a moving body that moves in an axial direction and has a constant width in the direction of the optical axis; 2. The lens driving device according to claim 1, wherein said detecting means is an optical detector. 3. The system according to claim 2, wherein the lens optical system is housed in a plurality of cylinders that can be extended in a multi-stage manner, and the movable lens group changes a standby position in accordance with an extension position of the cylinder. Item 3. The lens driving device according to item 1 or 2.